Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Foreword
Foreword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
*
C Copyright 2017 SUBARU CORPORATION
Vehicle types
SFWAB
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1
S00
Warranties & Warranties except for U.S.A. How to use this Owner’s 0
S00AA and Canada Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. S00AA06
All warranty information, including details S00AB
& Using your Owner’s Manual
S00AA01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of of coverage and exclusions, is in the
S00AB01
America, Inc. and sold at retail by an “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United Read these warranties carefully. read this manual. To protect yourself and
States come with the following warranties: extend the service life of your vehicle,
. SUBARU Limited Warranties follow the instructions in this manual.
. Federal Emission Control Systems Failure to observe these instructions may
Warranties result in serious injury and damage to your
. California Emissions Control Sys- vehicle.
tems Warranties This manual is composed of fourteen
All warranty information, including applic- chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
ability, details of coverage and exclusions, table of contents, so you can usually tell at
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance a glance if that chapter contains the
Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully. information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-
& Warranties for Canada bags
S00AA05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru This chapter informs you how to use the
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada tions for the SRS airbags.
come with the following warranties: Chapter 2: Keys and doors
. SUBARU Limited Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
. Emission Control System Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
All warranty information, including applic-
This chapter informs you about the opera-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
tion of instrument panel indicators and how
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.
to use the instruments and other switches.
Read these warranties carefully.
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle symbols Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with
S00AC driving considerable speed and force.
There are some of the symbols you may S00AD
Occupants who are out of proper
see on your vehicle. & Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag
S00AD01 deploys could suffer very serious
For warning and indicator lights, refer to injuries. Because the SRS airbag
“Warning and indicator lights” F23. WARNING
needs enough space for deploy-
Mark Name . All persons in the vehicle must ment, the driver should always sit
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE upright and well back in the seat
WARNING the vehicle starts to move. Other- as far from the steering wheel as
wise, the possibility of serious practical while still maintaining
injury becomes greater in the full vehicle control and the front
CAUTION event of a sudden stop or acci- passenger should move the seat
dent. as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
Read these instructions care- . To obtain maximum protection in
fully the event of an accident, the For instructions and precautions, carefully
driver and all passengers must read the following sections.
Wear eye protection always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple- . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
mental Restraint System) airbag belts” F1-12.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric does not do away with the need to . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
acid “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the System airbag)” F1-37.
Keep children away best combined protection in case
of a serious accident. & Child safety
S00AD02
collision, because the child will . NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR . When leaving the vehicle, close 0
be caught between the passen- REARWARD FACING CHILD all windows and lock all doors.
ger and objects inside the vehi- SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT.
cle. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN- For instructions and precautions, carefully
. While riding in the vehicle, infants JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD read the following sections.
and small children should always BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
be seated in the REAR seat in an TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR- belts” F1-12.
infant or child restraint system BAG. . For the child restraint system, refer to
which is appropriate for the . Always turn the child safety locks “Child restraint systems” F1-25.
child’s age, height and weight. If to the “LOCK” position when . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
a child is too big for a child children sit in the rear seat. “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
restraint system, the child should Serious injury could result if a System airbag)” F1-37.
sit in the REAR seat and be child accidentally opens the door
restrained using the seatbelts. and falls out. Refer to “Child
According to accident statistics, safety locks” F2-28.
children are safer when properly . Always lock the passenger’s win-
restrained in the rear seating dows using the lock switch when
positions than in the front seating children are riding in the vehicle.
positions. Never allow a child to Failure to follow this procedure
stand up or kneel on the seat. could result in injury to a child
. Place children in the REAR seat operating the power window. Re-
properly restrained at all times in fer to “Windows” F2-28.
a child restraint device or in a . Never leave unattended children,
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys adults or animals in the vehicle.
with considerable speed and They could accidentally injure
force and can injure or even kill themselves or others through
children, especially if they are not inadvertent operation of the ve-
restrained or improperly re- hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
strained. Because children are temperature in a closed vehicle
lighter and weaker than adults, could quickly become high en-
their risk of being injured from ough to cause severe or possibly
deployment is greater. fatal injuries to them.
– CONTINUED –
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem sumed too much alcohol to drive safely
monoxide) checked and corrected as soon even if the level of alcohol in your blood is
S00AD03 as possible. If you must drive below the legal limit. The safest thing you
WARNING under these conditions, drive can do is never drink and drive. However if
only with all windows fully open. you have no choice but to drive, stop
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the rear gate closed while drinking and sober up completely before
Engine exhaust gas contains driving to prevent exhaust gas getting behind the wheel.
carbon monoxide, a colorless from entering the vehicle.
and odorless gas which is dan- & Drugs and driving
S00AD05
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en- & Drinking and driving WARNING
gine exhaust system to prevent S00AD04
engine exhaust gas from entering There are some drugs (over the
WARNING counter and prescription) that can
the vehicle.
Drinking and then driving is very delay your reaction time and impair
. Never run the engine in a closed your perception, judgment and at-
space, such as a garage, except dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction time tentiveness. If you drive after taking
for the brief time needed to drive them, it may increase your, your
the vehicle in or out of it. and impairs your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive passengers’ and other persons’ risk
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve- after drinking – even if you drink just of being involved in a serious or fatal
hicle for a lengthy time while the a little – it will increase the risk of accident.
engine is running. If that is un- being involved in a serious or fatal
avoidable, then use the ventila- accident, injuring or killing yourself, If you are taking any drugs, check with
tion fan to force fresh air into the your passengers and others. In your doctor or pharmacist or read the
vehicle. addition, if you are injured in the literature that accompanies the medication
. Always keep the front ventilator accident, alcohol may increase the to determine if the drug you are taking can
inlet grille free from snow, leaves severity of that injury. impair your driving ability. Do not drive
or other obstructions to ensure after taking any medications that can make
Please don’t drink and drive. you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly. to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent have a medical condition that requires you
. If at any time you suspect that causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects to take drugs, please consult with your
exhaust fumes are entering the all people differently, you may have con- doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence & Modification of your vehicle & Driving vehicles equipped 0
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your S00AD07
with navigation system
own health and well-being, we urge you CAUTION S00AD09
Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the & Attaching accessories General information
front passenger’s seat. For further infor- S00AD15
S00AK
mation, consult your veterinarian, local WARNING & California proposition 65
animal protection society or pet shop. warning
. Do not attach any accessories, S00AK02
& Noise from under the vehicle depressing the accelerator and/or brake
0
S00AK01 pedal; and,
NOTE . How fast the vehicle was traveling.
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours These data can help provide a better
after the ignition switch is turned to the understanding of the circumstances in
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
does not indicate a malfunction. This EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
noise is caused by the operation of the only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
fuel evaporation leakage checking sys- no data are recorded by the EDR under
tem and the operation is normal. The normal driving conditions and no personal
noise will stop after approximately 15 data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
minutes. location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
& Event data recorder combine the EDR data with the type of
S00AK04 personally identifying data routinely ac-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data quired during a crash investigation.
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near To read data recorded by an EDR, special
crash-like situations, such as an air bag equipment is required, and access to the
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
that will assist in understanding how a to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is such as law enforcement, that have the
designed to record data related to vehicle special equipment, can read the informa-
dynamics and safety systems for a short tion if they have access to the vehicle or
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
(1,1)
Table of contents
12
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
Illustrated index 2) Front wipers (page 3-76)
S00AE 3) Headlights (page 3-65)
& Exterior 4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-36)
S00AE01
5) Moonroof (page 2-32)
6) Roof rails (page 8-13)
7) Outside mirror (page 3-86)
8) Door locks (page 2-21)
9) Tire pressure (page 11-23)
10) Flat tires (page 9-5)
11) Snow tires (page 8-10)
12) Fog lights (page 3-72)
13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
14) Towing hook (page 9-13)
13
1) Rear window defogger (page 3-87)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4) 0
3) Child safety locks (page 2-28)
4) Tie-down hole (page 9-13)
5) Rear gate (page 2-31)
6) Towing hook (page 9-13)
7) Rear window wiper (page 3-77)
– CONTINUED –
14
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
& Interior system (page 1-33)
S00AE02
2) Seatbelt (page 1-12)
! Passenger compartment area
S00AE0201 3) Front seat (page 1-2)
4) Rear seat (page 1-2)
5) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK
NOTE
For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU
STARLINK: Refer to the Owner’s Man-
ual supplement for SUBARU
STARLINK.
15
1) Power windows (page 2-28)
2) Door locks (page 2-21) 0
3) Outside mirror switch (page 3-86)
4) Glove box (page 6-5)
5) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)
6) Shift lever (MT models) (page 7-21)/
Select lever (CVT models) (page 7-24)
7) Seat heater switches (page 1-10)
8) Cup holder (page 6-6)
9) X-mode switch (page 7-39)
10) Center console (page 6-6)
11) Parking brake lever (page 7-43)
– CONTINUED –
16
1) Steering responsive fog lights OFF
& Instrument panel switch (page 3-72)/Steering Responsive
S00AE03
Headlight off switch (page 3-71)
2) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-12)
3) Combination meter (page 3-8)
4) Type A multi-function display (black and
white) (page 3-42)/Type B multi-function
display (color LCD) (page 3-47)
5) Audio*
6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)
7) Climate control (page 4-2)
8) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 3-89)
9) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-52)
10) Fuse box (page 11-34)
11) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5)
12) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-37)
*: For details about how to use the audio
and navigation system (if equipped), refer
to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
17
1) Audio control switches*
2) INFO button for type A multi-function 0
display (black and white) (page 3-42)/
INFO button for type B multi-function
display (color LCD) (page 3-47)
3) Cruise control (page 7-48)
4) Shift paddle (page 7-26)
5) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page 3-
89)
6) SRS airbag (page 1-37)
7) Horn (page 3-90)
8) Combination meter display (color LCD)
control switches (page 3-33)
9) Talk switch for voice command system*/
Hands-free phone switches*
*: For details about how to use the
switches, refer to the separate naviga-
tion/audio Owner’s Manual.
– CONTINUED –
18
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-74)
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 2) Mist (page 3-76)
S00AE04
3) Windshield washer (page 3-76)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-77)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-76)
6) Windshield wiper and washer switches
(page 3-76)
7) Light control switch (page 3-65)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-72)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-65)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 3-67)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-74)
19
1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
& Combination meter 2) Select lever/gear position indicator 0
S00AE05
(page 3-30)
! U.S.-spec. models (type A)
S00AE0538 3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –
20
1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
! U.S.-spec. models (type B) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator
S00AE0549
(page 3-30)
3) Combination meter display (color LCD)
(page 3-33)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
5) Speedometer (page 3-8)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
21
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type A) 1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
S00AE0531 2) Select lever/gear position indicator 0
(page 3-30)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –
22
1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator
S00AE0519
(page 3-30)
3) Combination meter display (color LCD)
(page 3-33)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
5) Speedometer (page 3-8)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
23
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
0
S00AE06
AT OIL TEMP warning High beam assist indi-
Mark Name Page light (CVT models) 3-18 cator light (green) (if 3-30
equipped)
Seatbelt warning light 3-13 High Beam Assist
ABS warning light 3-20 warning indicator (yel- 3-30
low) (if equipped)
Front passenger’s 3-13 Automatic headlight
seatbelt warning light Brake system warning 3-21
light beam leveler warning 3-31
light (if equipped)
SRS airbag system 3-15
warning light Door open warning Steering Responsive
/ light 3-22 Headlight warning
light/Steering Respon- 3-31
Front passenger’s sive Headlight OFF in-
frontal airbag ON indi- 3-15 AWD warning light dicator light (if
cator (CVT models) 3-22
equipped)
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag OFF in- 3-15 Power steering warn- Front fog light indicator 3-31
dicator ing light 3-23 light (if equipped)
CHECK ENGINE Hill start assist warning
warning light/Malfunc- 3-15 Access key warning 3-25
light/Hill start assist 3-22 indicator (if equipped)
tion indicator light OFF indicator light
Coolant temperature Vehicle Dynamics
low indicator light/ 3-16 Control warning light/ Security indicator light 3-29
Coolant temperature Vehicle Dynamics 3-23
high warning light Control operation indi-
cator light Headlight indicator 3-31
Charge warning light 3-17 light (if equipped)
Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator 3-24
light Cruise control indica- 3-31
Oil pressure warning 3-17 tor light (if equipped)
light
Turn signal indicator 3-30
lights Cruise control set indi-
Engine oil level warn- cator light (if equipped) 3-31
3-18
ing light
High beam indicator 3-30
light
– CONTINUED –
24
Steering responsive
fog lights warning indi-
cator/Steering respon- 3-31
sive fog lights OFF
indicator (if equipped)
25
Function settings 0
S00AF
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact the
nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD)*, audio unit or navigation
unit*, the settings for some of these functions can be changed using the display. For details, refer to “Combination meter display (color
LCD)” F3-33.
*: if equipped
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Monitoring start delay time (after 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
closure of doors)
Dome light, cargo area light, and ON/OFF OFF
map lights illumination
Keyless Access (if equipped) Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Door unlock selection function (dri- Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only
ver’s door unlock)
Door unlock selection function (rear Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only
gate unlock)
Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Defogger and deicer system for Rear window defogger, outside mir- Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15 minutes
models with the automatic climate ror defogger and windshield wiper Continuous operation
control system deicer
– CONTINUED –
26
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the head restraints from function-
ing as intended. Therefore, when
WARNING WARNING you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
Seatbelts provide maximum re- Never stack luggage or other cargo straints correctly to protect vehi-
straint when the occupant sits well higher than the top of the seatback cle occupants.
back and upright in the seat. Do not because it could tumble forward and
. All occupants, including the dri-
put cushions or any other materials injure passengers in the event of a
ver, should not operate a vehicle
between occupants and seatbacks sudden stop or accident.
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
head restraints are placed in their
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
proper positions in order to mini-
of the lap belt sliding up over the
mize the risk of neck injury in the
abdomen will increase, and both can
event of a crash.
result in serious internal injury or
death.
& Front seats ! Reclining the seatback ! Seat height adjustment (driver’s 1
S01AQ02 S01AQ020102
seat)
! Manual seat (if equipped) S01AQ020103
S01AQ0201
– CONTINUED –
! Power seat (driver’s seat – if & Rear seats ! Folding down the rear seatback
equipped) S01AQ03 S01AQ0302
WARNING 1
When returning the seatback to its
original position, observe the fol-
lowing precaution.
Failure to observe the precaution
may damage the seatbelt, impairing
its effectiveness, and possibly re-
sult in a serious injury.
. When returning the seatback to
its original position, pull the
seatbelt out towards the vehicle
Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock exterior so that it will not be Lock release knob
release knob and then fold the seatback caught between the seatback 1) Unlocked
down. and the trim. 2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
! Return the rear seatback
S01AQ0303 To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that the unlock-
ing marker on the lock release knob is no
longer visible.
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its
original position, check that the
unlocking marker on the lock re-
lease knob is not visible. Also, shake
the seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may suddenly
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat head
restraints are designed to be in-
stalled into the rear seats only. Do
not attempt to install the front seat
head restraints into the rear seats, or
the rear seat head restraints into the
front seats.
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
1) Head restraint that the center of the head restraint is
NOTE 2) Release button closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
It is possible to adjust the angle of the
To raise:
front seat head restraints only. When NOTE
installing the front seat head restraints, Pull the head restraint up.
When the head restraint cannot be
make sure that the angle of the head To lower: pulled out or installed due to insuffi-
restraints can be adjusted. Push the head restraint down while press- cient clearance between the head re-
ing the release button on the top of the straint and the roof, tilt the seat and
seatback. then perform the installation and re-
To remove: moval tasks.
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
! Angle adjustment ! Rear seats After installing the head restraint, make
S01AQ040102 S01AQ0402
sure it is securely locked.
1
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head ! Rear center seating position
restraints. S01AQ040202
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
1) Head restraint . People with delicate skin may
2) Release button suffer slight burns even at low
To raise: temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
Pull the head restraint up.
When using the heater, always be
To lower: sure to warn the persons con-
Push the head restraint down while press- cerned.
ing the release button on the top of the
. Do not put anything on the seat
seatback.
which insulates against heat,
To remove: such as a blanket, cushion, or
While pressing the release button, pull out similar items. This may cause the
the head restraint. seat heater to overheat.
To install: . When the seat is warmed enough
Install the head restraint into the holes that or before you leave the vehicle,
are located on the top of the seatback until be sure to turn off the seat heater.
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
NOTE & Operation To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or
“HI” position on the switch, as desired,
1
Use of the seat heater for a long period S01AB04
1) HI – Rapid heating
2) LO – Normal heating
3) Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
passenger when any of the SRS frontal, times. waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
side and curtain airbags deploy. cannot be properly positioned, a child
1
NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR
REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN restraint system should be used. Never
! Infants or small children
S01AE0101
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS place the shoulder belt under the child’s
Use a child restraint system that is suitable arm or behind the child’s back.
for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
systems” F1-25. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE ! Expectant mothers
S01AE0103
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
! Children THE SRS AIRBAG.
S01AE0102
According to accident statistics,
WARNING children are safer when properly
Place children in the rear seat prop- restrained in the rear seating posi-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS tions than in the front seating posi-
airbag deploys with considerable tions. For instructions and precau-
speed and force and can injure or tions concerning the child restraint
even kill children, especially if they system, refer to “Child restraint
are not restrained or improperly systems” F1-25.
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their If a child is too big for a child restraint
risk of being injured from deploy- system, the child should sit in the rear seat
ment is greater. For that reason, we and be restrained using the seatbelts. Expectant mothers also need to use the
strongly recommend that ALL chil- According to accident statistics, children seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
dren (including those in child seats are safer when properly restrained in the for specific recommendations. The lap belt
and those that have outgrown child rear seating positions than in the front should be worn securely and as low as
restraint devices) sit in the REAR seating positions. Never allow a child to possible over the hips, not over the waist.
seat properly restrained at all times stand up or kneel on the seat.
in a child restraint device or in a If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate the face or neck, move the child closer to
for the child’s height and weight. the belt buckle to help provide a good
Secure ALL types of child restraint shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
devices (including forward facing securely place the lap belt as low as
child seats) in the REAR seats at all possible on the hips and not on the child’s
– CONTINUED –
& Emergency Locking Retrac- the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, 2. Sit well back in the seat.
tor (ELR) the seatbelt must be changed over to the 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
S01AE02 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR). When the child restraint system is re- . If the belt stops before reaching the
moved, make sure that the seatbelt re- buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
The emergency locking retractor allows
tracts fully and the retractor returned to the out more slowly.
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop, Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly mode. the belt retract slightly after giving it a
out of the retractor. For instructions on how to convert the strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
& Automatic Locking Retractor/ the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
Emergency Locking Retrac- restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”
tor (ALR/ELR) F1-28.
S01AE03
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- & Seatbelt warning light
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic and chime S01AE04
S01AE0602
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
– CONTINUED –
1. Raise the head restraint to the ex- 3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it 4. After confirming that the webbing is not
tended position. Do not remove the head through the belt guide as follows: First twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
restraint. insert one edge of the belt into the open attached at the webbing end into the
gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of buckle on the right-hand side until a click
the belt in, so that the whole belt fits inside. is heard.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate 2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard
into the center seatbelt buckle marked pointed object into the slot in the connector
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it
clicks. in. The connector (tongue) plate will then
1. Push the release button of the center disconnect from the buckle.
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
CAUTION
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
. Do not allow the retractor to roll oils, chemicals and particularly
up the seatbelt too quickly. Other- battery acid.
wise, the metal tongue plates . Never attempt to make modifica-
may hit against the trim, resulting tions or changes that will prevent
in damaged trim. the seatbelt from operating prop-
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up erly.
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. damage to the trim.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Insert the connector (tongue)
into the belt holder.
. Side impact sensor ! In cases of rollover accident, frontal On the front passenger’s side, the
. Front door impact sensor collisions or side collisions, the shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen-
. Rollover sensor following components will operate ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
simultaneously located at the base of the center pillar. Like
If the sensor detects a certain predeter- S01AF0101
For details, refer to “In cases of rollover the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt
mined amount of force during frontal or accident, frontal collisions or side colli- pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the
side collisions or rollover accidents, any sions, the following components will oper- belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is ate simultaneously” F1-23. frontal collision force is detected. As a
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat
take up the slack so that the belt more occupant more effectively.
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt
and lap belt pretensioners The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-
The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes S01AF02 sioner includes a tension reducing device
a tension reducing device which limits the
NOTE which limits the peak forces exerted by the
peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the This section is applicable to the front seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a
occupant in the event of a collision. passenger’s side seatbelt. collision.
The adaptive force limiter will select a
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, reducing load to the suit body size of
an operating noise will be heard and a occupant as detected by the occupant
small amount of smoke will be released. detection sensor.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
fire in the vehicle. an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been These occurrences are normal and not
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not fire in the vehicle.
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced. Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
belt pretensioner and adaptive force cannot be pulled out and retracted and
limiter) therefore must be replaced.
2) Lap belt pretensioner
! In cases of rollover accident, frontal collisions or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously 1
S01AF0201
Driver’s side Front passen- Front passen- SRS frontal SRS frontal
seatbelt pre- ger’s side ger’s side lap airbag for dri- airbag for front SRS curtain SRS side air-
tensioner shoulder belt belt preten- ver passenger airbags bags
pretensioner sioner
Rollover accidents * * – – – * –
both sides
*1
Frontal collisions * * * * * – –
Offset frontal * * * * * *1 * –
collisions both sides
*: Activated
–: Not activated
*1: This does not operate if the occupant detection system deactivates airbag operation.
*2: When both the satellite safing sensor and any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors sense an impact force.
*3: When both the satellite safing sensor and the driver’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.
However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the
seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.
*4: When both the satellite safing sensor and the front passenger’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.
However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the
seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.
– CONTINUED –
& System monitors the seatbelt pretensioner, con- operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
S01AF03
A diagnostic system continually monitors sult your nearest SUBARU deal- as soon as possible.
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner er.
while the vehicle is being driven. The & Precautions against vehicle
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
CAUTION modification
module with the SRS airbag system. S01AF05
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a The sensors and SRS airbag control want to install any accessory parts to your
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag modules are located in the following vehicle.
system warning light will illuminate. For locations.
details, refer to “SRS airbag system CAUTION
monitors” F1-66. . Front sub sensors: on both the
right and left side at the front of
Do not perform any of the following
the vehicle
& System servicing modifications. Such modifications
S01AF04 . Front door impact sensors: on can interfere with proper operation
WARNING both front doors of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Satellite safing sensor: under the . Attachment of any equipment
. When discarding a seatbelt re- rear center seat (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
tractor assembly or scrapping . SRS airbag control module (in- skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
the entire vehicle damaged by a cluding the impact sensors): un- ine SUBARU accessory parts to
collision, consult your SUBARU der the center of the instrument the front end.
dealer. panel . Modification of the suspension
. Tampering with or disconnecting If you need service or repair in those system or front end structure.
the system’s wiring could result areas or near the front seatbelt
in accidental activation of the . Installation of a tire of different
retractors, have the work performed size and construction from the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
SRS airbag or could make the tires specified on the vehicle
system inoperative, which may placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
result in serious injury. Do not NOTE dual vehicle models in this Own-
use electrical test equipment on If the front or side part of the vehicle is
any circuit related to the seatbelt er’s Manual.
damaged in an accident to the extent
pretensioner and SRS airbag sys- that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
tems. For required servicing of
Child restraint systems Children could be endangered in an while the vehicle is moving. The 1
S01AG
accident if their child restraints are not passenger cannot protect the child
properly secured in the vehicle. When from injury in a collision, because
installing the child restraint system, care- the child will be caught between the
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. passenger and objects inside the
vehicle.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the Additionally, holding a child in your
rear seating positions than in the front lap or arms in the front seat exposes
seating positions. that child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces considerable speed and force, the
require that infants and small children be child could be injured or even killed.
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or WARNING
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of WARNING Children should be properly re-
child restraint systems by use of lower and strained at all times. Never allow a
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-33). Never let a passenger hold a child on child to stand up, or to kneel on any
his or her lap or in his or her arms
– CONTINUED –
seat. Unrestrained children will be . Do not leave an unsecured child & Where to place a child re-
thrown forward during sudden stop restraint system in your vehicle. straint system
or in an accident and can be injured Unsecured child restraint sys- The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
S01AG01
seriously. tems can be thrown around in- dations on where to place a child restraint
Additionally, children standing up or side of the vehicle in a sudden system in your vehicle.
kneeling on or in front of the front stop, turn or accident; they can
seat are exposed another serious strike and injure vehicle occu-
danger. Since the SRS airbag de- pants as well as result in serious
ploys with considerable speed and injuries or death to the child.
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
& Safety tips for installing child system, follow the manufacturer’s
restraint systems instructions supplied with it. After
S01AG16
installing the child restraint system,
WARNING check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
. Child restraint systems and seat- tight and secure, the danger of your A: Front passenger’s seat
belts can become hot in a vehicle child suffering personal injury in the
that has been closed up in sunny You should not install a child restraint
event of an accident may be in- system (including a booster seat) due to
weather; they could burn a small creased.
child. Check the child restraint the hazard to children posed by the
system before you place a child passenger’s airbag.
in it. B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, the following equipment
is provided for installing a child restraint
system.
. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- the center seating position if a child priate for the child’s age, height
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat- restraint system manufacturer’s instruc- and weight. According to acci-
1
belts tions permit and specify using anchors as dent statistics, children are safer
. Lower anchorages (bars) far apart as those in this vehicle. when properly restrained in the
. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages) If a child restraint system is not correctly rear seating positions than in the
fixed in place (for example, if a child front seating positions.
Some types of child restraints might not be restraint system can be moved more than . Do not use lower anchorages
able to be secured firmly due to projection 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you (bars) for a seat in the center
of the seat cushion. should install the child restraint system in a seating position unless a child
In this seating position, you should use rear seat, window-side seating position. restraint system manufacturer’s
only a child restraint system that has a instructions permit and specify
bottom base that fits snugly against the WARNING using anchors spaced as far
contours of the seat cushion and can be apart as those in this vehicle.
securely retained using the seatbelt. . Even with advanced airbags, chil-
dren can be seriously injured by . Do not connect two or more lower
C: Rear seat, center seating position the airbag. Place children in the hooks onto the same anchorage
The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper rear seat properly restrained at (bar).
anchorage (tether anchorage) are pro- all times. The SRS airbag deploys
vided in this position. with considerable speed and
Some types of child restraints might not be force and can injure or even kill
able to be secured firmly due to projection children, especially if they are not
of the seat cushion. restrained or improperly re-
In this seating position, you should use strained. Because children are
only a child restraint system that has a lighter and weaker than adults,
bottom base that fits snugly against the their risk of being injured from
contours of the seat cushion and can be deployment is greater.
securely retained using the seatbelt. For that reason, be sure to secure
When you install a child restraint system in ALL types of child restraint de-
the rear seat’s center seating position, vices (including forward facing
raise the center head restraint. child seats) in the REAR seats at
Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side all times. You should choose a
seating positions may be used for a seat in restraint device which is appro-
– CONTINUED –
child with proper protection. The child ! Installing a rearward facing child
WARNING restraint system should meet all applicable restraint
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle S01AG0401
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S Safety Standards for the United States or WARNING
SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING for Canada. It can be identified by looking NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR
CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT for the label on the child restraint system or REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO the manufacturer’s statement of compli- THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT.
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH ance in the document attached to the DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE system. OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE Also it is important for you to make sure CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
SRS AIRBAG. that the child restraint system is compa- CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
tible with the vehicle in which it will be
used.
& Choosing a child restraint
system & Installing child restraint sys-
S01AG02 tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt
S01AG04
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seating
position, set both seatbacks to the
original position. Otherwise, the
child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained, which may re-
sult in death or serious injuries in 1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
the event of sudden stop, sudden that it is securely locked into place.
steering maneuver or an accident. – Check the red colored unlocking
marker which is attached to the bottom
Choose a child restraint system that is of the lock release knob is invisible. For
appropriate for the child’s age and size details, refer to “Folding down the rear
(weight and height) in order to provide the
– CONTINUED –
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm When you intend to install a child
that it is securely locked into place. restraint system on the rear center
– Check the red colored unlocking seating position, if the child restraint
4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
marker which is attached to the bottom system does not fit snugly against
or around the child restraint system follow-
of the lock release knob is invisible. For the contours of the rear center seat
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
details, refer to “Folding down the rear cushion, install the child restraint
facturer.
seatback” F1-6. system on the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer – When a child restraint system is
2. Prepare the rear seat head restraint to “Where to place a child restraint installed on the rear center seating
where a child restraint system is intended system” F1-26. position, pass the rear center seatbelt
to be installed in the following way. through the belt guide properly. For
details, refer to “Rear center seatbelt”
– When a child restraint system is F1-17.
installed on the window-side seating
position, remove the rear seat head 5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
restraint. For details, refer to “Rear until you hear a click.
seats” F1-9.
Store the head restraint in the cargo
area. Avoid placing the head restraint
in the passenger compartment to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sudden
stop or a sharp turn.
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 8. Before having a child sit in the child 10. Latch the top tether hook onto the
7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and tether anchorage that is located behind the
retractor to change the retractor over from forth and right and left to check if it is firmly rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to secured. Sometimes a child restraint For additional instructions, refer to “Top
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) system can be more firmly secured by tether anchorages” F1-36.
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into pushing it down into the seat cushion and
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, then tightening the seatbelt.
clicks will be heard which indicate the 9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
press the release button on the seatbelt & Installing a booster seat
buckle and allow the belt to retract S01AG05
– CONTINUED –
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for ! To install a child restraint system
installing a child restraint system only on using lower and tether an-
the rear seat window-side seating posi- chorages
tions. For each window-side seating posi- S01AG070103
To install a child restraint system using
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
lower and tether anchorages, perform the
Each lower anchorage is located where following procedure.
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
! Tether anchorages WARNING
S01AG070102
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result. 2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of
the rear seat seatbacks. These marks
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm indicate the positions of the lower an-
that it is securely locked into place. chorages (bars).
– Check the red colored unlocking
marker which is attached to the bottom
of the lock release knob is invisible. For
details, refer to “Folding down the rear
seatback” F1-6.
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided at the locations
shown in the above illustration. For details,
refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-36.
5. [If your child restraint system is of a 7. Before seating a child in the child
flexible attachment type (which uses tether restraint system, try to move it back and
4. While following the instructions sup- belts to connect the child restraint system forth and right and left to verify that it is held
plied by the child restraint system manu- properly to the lower anchorages)] securely in position.
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the While pushing the child restraint into the 8. To remove the child restraint system,
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on seat cushion, pull both left and right lower follow the reverse procedures of installa-
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the tether belts up to secure the child restraint tion.
hooks are connected, make sure the system firmly by taking up the slack in the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. belt. If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
6. Latch the top tether hook onto the
SUBARU dealer.
tether anchorage that is located behind the
rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top
tether anchorages” F1-36.
– CONTINUED –
& Top tether anchorages ! Anchorage location ! To hook the top tether
S01AG09 S01AG0901 S01AG0902
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint CAUTION
system having a top tether can be installed
in the rear seat. When installing a child . Except for the center seating
restraint system using top tether, proceed position, remove the head re-
as follows, while observing the instructions straint when mounting a child
by the child restraint system manufacturer. restraint system. Otherwise, it
might be possible that the top
Since a top tether can provide additional tether cannot be fastened tightly.
stability by offering another connection . For the center seating position,
between a child restraint system and the raise the center head restraint to
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top the extended position when
tether whenever one is required or avail- mounting a child restraint sys-
able. tem. Otherwise, it will be impos-
sible to use the seatbelt guide
that is attached to the head
restraint correctly.
The seatbelt guide is essential for
routing the belt webbing at the
center seating position. For in-
formation about using the seat-
belt guide, refer to “Rear center
seatbelt” F1-17.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-37
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
& General precautions regard- help avoid injuries that can result as far back as possible and sit
ing SRS airbag system when an occupant is not seated upright and well back in the seat.
S01AH10 in a proper upright position.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
designed only to be a supplement
to the primary protection pro-
vided by the seatbelt. It does not
eliminate the need to fasten seat-
belts. In combination with the
seatbelts, it offers the best com-
bined protection in case of a
serious accident. WARNING
Not wearing a seatbelt increases WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
the chance of severe injury or . The SRS airbags deploy with close to either front door. The
death in a crash even when the considerable speed and force. SRS side airbags are stored in
vehicle has the SRS airbag. Occupants who are out of proper both front seat seatbacks next to
For instructions and precautions position when the SRS airbag the door, and they provide pro-
concerning the seatbelt system, deploys could suffer very serious tection by deploying rapidly (fas-
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-12. injuries. Because the SRS airbag ter than the blink of an eye) in the
. The SRS side airbag and SRS needs enough space for deploy- event of a side impact or frontal
curtain airbag are designed only ment, the driver should always sit collision. However, the force of
to be a supplement to the primary upright and well back in the seat SRS side airbag deployment may
protection provided by the seat- as far from the steering wheel as cause injuries if your head or
belt. They do not eliminate the practical while still maintaining other parts of the body are too
need to fasten seatbelts. It is also full vehicle control and the front close to the SRS side airbag.
important to wear your seatbelt to passenger should move the seat
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-39
. Since your vehicle is equipped thrown forward during pre-acci- between you and the SRS airbag. 1
with SRS curtain airbags, do not dent braking. If the SRS airbag deploys, these
sit or lean unnecessarily close to Even when properly positioned, objects could interfere with its
the front or rear door on either there remains a possibility that proper operation and could be
side. Also, do not put your head, an occupant may suffer minor propelled inside the vehicle,
arms or hands out of the window. injury such as abrasions and causing injury.
The SRS curtain airbags on both bruises to the face or arms be-
sides of the cabin are stored in cause of the SRS airbag deploy-
the roof side (between the front ment force. CAUTION
pillar and a point behind the rear
quarter glass), and they provide . When the SRS airbag deploys,
protection by deploying rapidly some smoke will be released.
(faster than the blink of an eye) in This smoke could cause breath-
the event of a side impact, roll- ing problems for people with a
over or an offset frontal collision. history of asthma or other breath-
However, the force of its deploy- ing trouble. If you or your pas-
ment may cause injuries if your sengers have breathing pro-
head is too close to it. blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because . A deploying SRS airbag releases
the SRS airbag deploys with hot gas. Occupants could get
considerable speed – faster than burned if they come into direct
the blink of an eye – and force to contact with the hot gas.
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure WARNING NOTE
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag. . Do not rest your arm on either . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
front door or its internal trim. You you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
It is also important to wear your could be injured in the event of is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,
seatbelt to help avoid injuries SRS side airbag deployment. notify the buyer of the applicable sec-
that can result when the SRS tion in this Owner’s Manual.
airbag contacts an occupant not . Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or . If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
in proper position such as one supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
– CONTINUED –
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
of fire caused by leaking fuel. For deploys, those objects could in-
details about restarting of the engine, terfere with its proper operation
refer to “If your vehicle is involved in an and could be propelled inside the
accident” F9-20. vehicle, causing injury.
. The key must not be attached to
& General precautions regard- heavy, sharp or hard acces-
ing SRS airbag system for sories, or another key. If the SRS
accessories and any objects knee airbag deploys, those ob-
S01AH13 jects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
WARNING
. Do not put any objects (including
straps or cords) over the steering
wheel pad, column cover, or
dashboard.
– These objects could be en-
tangled with the steering
wheel, preventing the SRS
frontal airbag, etc. from oper-
ating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag de-
ploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle, WARNING
causing injury.
Do not attach accessories to the
. Do not put any objects under the windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
driver’s side of the instrument ror over the inside rear view mirror. If
panel. If the SRS knee airbag
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-41
the SRS airbag deploys, those ob- pillar, the windshield, a side win- ment of the SRS curtain airbags, 1
jects could become projectiles that dow, an assist grip, or any other they could cause serious injuries by
could seriously injure vehicle occu- cabin surface that would be near coming off the coat hooks and being
pants. a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A thrown through the cabin or by
hands-free microphone or other preventing deployment of the cur-
accessory in such a location tain airbags.
could be propelled through the Before hanging clothing on the coat
cabin with great force by the hooks, make sure there are no sharp
curtain airbag, or it could prevent objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
correct deployment of the curtain ing directly on the coat hooks with-
airbag. In either case, the result out using hangers.
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
WARNING
WARNING
occupants and cause injuries. . Do not put any kind of clothes or
. Do not attach a hands-free micro- Do not hang coat hangers or other other objects over either front
phone or any other accessory to hard or pointed objects on the coat seatback and do not attach labels
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear hooks. If such items were hanging or stickers to the front seat sur-
on the coat hooks during deploy-
– CONTINUED –
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
face on or near the SRS side & General precautions regard- have outgrown child restraint de-
airbag. They could prevent prop- ing SRS airbag system and vices) sit in the REAR seat properly
er deployment of the SRS side children restrained at all times in a child
airbag, reducing protection avail- S01AH14 restraint device or in a seatbelt,
able to the front seat’s occupant. whichever is appropriate for the
. Do not install a seat cover unless child’s age, height and weight.
it is a genuine SUBARU seat Secure ALL types of child restraint
cover exclusively designed for devices (including forward facing
use with the SRS airbag. Even child seats) in the REAR seats at all
when using a genuine SUBARU times.
seat cover, the SRS side airbag According to accident statistics,
system may not function nor- children are safer when properly
mally if the seat cover is not restrained in the rear seating posi-
installed correctly. tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint sys-
WARNING tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-
Place children in the rear seat prop- tems” F1-25.
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-43
– CONTINUED –
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-45
– CONTINUED –
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1) Airbag control module (including impact 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
sensor and rollover sensor) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side) side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-47
& SUBARU advanced frontal ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at- different ways depending on the severity
1
airbag system tached to the glove box lid beginning with of impact.
S01AH02 the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
advanced frontal airbag system that com- the instructions on the warning labels and
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag tag.
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
No. 208. advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
system automatically determines the de- occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal seated in an appropriate child restraint
airbag at the time of deployment as well as system.
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
activated, the deployment force of the SRS to “Components” F1-45.
SRS airbag system warning light
frontal airbag at the time of deployment. In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
Have the system inspected by your
the following components deploy.
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
. SRS frontal airbag for driver airbag system warning light illuminates.
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. SRS knee airbag for driver NOTE
. SRS curtain airbag*1 The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not controlled by the
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs. tem.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
Your vehicle has warning labels on the S01AH0201
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH stage inflator. The inflator operates in
– CONTINUED –
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air- airbag deploys. This is normal. In this seat.
bag case, although the front passenger’s SRS . Do not place anything (shoes,
S01AH0202
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag frontal airbag does not operate, the front umbrella, etc.) under the front
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper- passenger’s seat.
operates in different ways depending on ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
sioner. For details about the seatbelt . Do not place any objects (books,
the severity of impact. etc.) around the front passen-
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-
sioners” F1-21. ger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
CAUTION seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the . Do not leave any articles on the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag front passenger’s seat or the
system from functioning correctly seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
or cause the system to fail. gaged when you leave your vehi-
cle.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat such . Do not put sharp object(s) on the
as by kicking. seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery.
1) Occupant detection sensors . Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat- . Do not place a magnet near the
The occupant detection system sensors back and seat cushion. seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
are installed between the seat and seat retractor.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
rails, and monitor the physique and pos- . Do not use front seats with their
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
ture of the front passenger. Using this forward-backward position and
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
information, the occupant detection sys- seatback not being locked into
tem determines whether the front passen- . Do not remove or disassemble place securely. If any of them are
ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de- the front passenger’s seat. not locked securely, adjust them
ployed or not. . Do not install any accessory again. For adjusting procedure,
(such as an audio amplifier) other refer to “Forward and backward
The occupant detection system may not
than a genuine SUBARU acces- adjustment” F1-5 and “Reclining
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
sory under the front passenger’s the seatback” F1-5.
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-49
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, laptops, portable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera- SRS airbag system warning light ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
tion of the occupant detection sys- indicator
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
tem. If either of the following situa- / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of indicator
tions occurs when using an electro-
the system to determine deployment.
nic device in the vehicle, at first try If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat
to relocate that device to avoid it and OFF indicators do not work properly
dry naturally and then check the SRS
creating any interference. even when the front passenger’s seat is
airbag system warning light.
. The SRS airbag system warning dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
light illuminates. passenger’s seat and have the occupant
. The front passenger’s frontal air- detection system checked by your
bag ON and OFF indicators oper- SUBARU dealer.
ate erratically.
If the device continues to cause
interference, the use of that device
in the vehicle should be discontin-
ued.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-51
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-53
! Conditions in which front passen- ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
OFF indicator illuminates and the position.
1
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
S01AH0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag ON indicator turns off even when
the front passenger’s seat is If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
will be activated for deployment upon while the ON indicator remains off, take the
impact when any of the following condi- occupied by an adult
S01AH020501 following actions.
tions are met regarding the front passen- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
ger’s seat. “OFF” position.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult. 2. Make sure that the front passenger
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water) does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat
are placed on the seat. cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON system to complete self-checking. Follow-
indicator ing the system check, both indicators turn
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly remains off.
sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ nated while the ON indicator remains off,
“OFF” position. ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
2. Ask the front passenger to set the and immediately contact your SUBARU
seatback to the upright position, sit up dealer for an inspection.
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
– CONTINUED –
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-55
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS passenger’s SRS frontal airbags would not
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.
CAUTION
protect the occupant in those situations.
1
The two inflators of each airbag are Do not touch the SRS airbag system
triggered either sequentially or simulta- SRS airbag deployment depends on the
components around the steering
neously, depending on the severity of level of force experienced in the passen-
wheel and dashboard with bare
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS ger compartment during a collision. That
hands right after deployment. Doing
frontal airbag and depending on the level differs from one type of collision to
so can cause burns because the
severity of impact and the characteristic another, and it may have no bearing on the
components can be very hot as a
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
result of deployment.
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air- ! Example of accident in which the
bag. driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
! Example of the type of accident
! After deployment S01AH0211 senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
S01AH0210
will most likely deploy
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de- S01AH021101
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s signed as follows.
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s . to deploy in the event of an accident
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is involving a moderate to severe frontal
not impaired. The time required from collision
detecting impact to the deflation of the . to function on a one-time-only basis
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye. The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front designed as follows.
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, . to deploy in most lesser frontal im-
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt pacts*1
pretensioners operate at the same time. . to deploy in most side or rear impacts or
in most rollover accidents*2
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, A head-on collision against a thick con-
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and *1: Because the necessary protection can be crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
some smoke will be released. These achieved by the seatbelt alone. mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
occurrences are a normal result of the *2: Because deployment of only the driver’s
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
deployment. This smoke does not indicate SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and front
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
a fire in the vehicle. airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
– CONTINUED –
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a ! Examples of the types of acci- Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
frontal impact similar in fashion and dents in which it is possible that driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
magnitude to the collision described the driver’s/driver’s and front airbags may be activated when the vehicle
above. passenger’s SRS frontal sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
airbag(s) will deploy riage area from the road surface (such as
S01AH021102 when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,
is severely impacted or knocked hard
against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-57
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/ telephone pole or sign pole. 1
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
S01AH021103
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of acci- frontal airbags are not designed to deploy once either or both of the driver’s and front
dents in which the driver’s/dri- in most of the following cases. passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS . If the vehicle is struck from the side or activated on the first impact, it/they will
frontal airbag(s) are not de- from behind not be activated on the second impact.
signed to deploy in most cases . If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof & SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH021104
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed curtain airbag
frontal collision S01AH03
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-59
– CONTINUED –
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! In cases of rollover accident or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously
S01AH0306
*: Activated
–: Not activated
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-61
! After deployment After deployment, do not touch any experienced in the passenger compart-
S01AH0304
part of the SRS curtain airbag sys- ment during a side impact collision. That
1
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time tem (from the front pillar to the part level differs from one type of collision to
required from detection of an impact to of the roof side over the rear seat). another, and it may have no bearing on the
deflation of an SRS side airbag after Doing so can cause burns because visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
deployment is shorter than the blink of an the components can be very hot as a
! Example of the type of accident in
eye. result of deployment.
which the SRS side airbag will
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated most likely deploy.
! Example of the type of accident S01AH030501
for a while following deployment then S01AH0305
slowly deflates. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain . to deploy in the event of an accident
airbag deploy even when no one occupies involving a moderate to severe side impact
the seat on the side on which an impact is collision
applied. . to function on a one-time-only basis.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud airbag are not designed to deploy in the
inflation noise will be heard and some following cases:
smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy- . in most lesser side impact
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire . in most frontal or most rear impacts
in the vehicle. (because the SRS side airbag and SRS 1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
curtain airbag deployment would not pro-
CAUTION tect the occupant in those situations)
Do not touch the SRS side airbag The SRS curtain airbags are also de-
system components around the signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
front seat seatback with bare hands extremely inclined state such as during a
right after deployment. Doing so can rollover. They are not designed to deploy in
cause burns because the compo- most lesser inclined state.
nents can be very hot as a result of SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment. deployment depend on the level of force
– CONTINUED –
1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-63
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side surface 1
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy. 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
S01AH030503
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
– CONTINUED –
1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-65
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely on impact. 1
to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
S01AH030505
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
1-66 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of acci- ary). same direction, once the SRS side airbag
2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
dents in which the SRS side
3) The vehicle pitches end over end. the first impact, they will not be activated
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in In the event of accidents like those on the second.
most cases illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH030506
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy & SRS airbag system monitors
S01AH04
in most cases.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-67
The following components are monitored WARNING & SRS airbag system servicing 1
by the indicator: S01AH05
1-68 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
. Under the center of the instru- NOTE & Precautions against vehicle
ment panel In the following cases, contact your modification
. On both the right and left sides at SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. S01AH06
the front of the vehicle . The front part of the vehicle was WARNING
. Steering wheel and column and involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both To avoid accidental activation of the
nearby areas
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS system or rendering the system
. Bottom of the steering column frontal airbags did not deploy. inoperative, which may result in
and nearby areas . The pad of the steering wheel, the serious injury, no modifications
. Top of the dashboard on front cover over the front passenger’s SRS should be made to any components
passenger’s side and nearby frontal airbag, or either roof side (from or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
areas the front pillar to a point over the rear This includes following modifica-
. Each front seat and nearby area seat) is scratched, cracked, or other- tions.
wise damaged.
. Inside each center pillar . Installation of custom steering
. The center pillar, front door, rear
. Inside each front door wheels
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
. In each roof side (from the front area near these parts, was involved in . Attachment of additional trim ma-
pillar to a point over the rear seat) an accident in which the SRS side terials to the dashboard
. Between the rear seat cushion airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not . Installation of custom seats
and rear wheel house on each deploy. . Replacement of seat fabric or
side . The fabric or leather of either front leather
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
. Under the rear center seat damaged. . Installation of additional fabric or
. The rear part of the vehicle was leather on the front seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is involved in an accident in which no . Attachment of a hands-free mi-
deployed, replacement of the system SRS airbag was deployed. crophone or any other accessory
should be performed only by an author- to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- rear pillar, the windshield, a side
nents of the SRS airbag system are window, an assist grip, or any
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU other cabin surface that would be
parts. near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-69
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
(103,1)
push-button start system”, refer to trolled with the buttons on the key. For The following access key fobs are pro-
“Keyless access with push-button start detailed information, refer to “Remote vided with the vehicle.
system” F2-2. keyless entry system” F2-17.
The following keys are provided with the
vehicle. CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,
thereby stopping the engine.
may damage the battery or the operation of the airplane. and power transmission lines
cause circuit malfunctions. When carrying the access key – When products that transmit
– Do not wash the access key fob in a bag, take measures to radio waves are used, such as an
prevent the buttons from being access key fob or a remote trans- 2
fob in an ultrasonic washer.
pressed accidentally. mitter key of another vehicle
– Do not leave the access key
– When carrying the access key fob
fob in humid or dusty loca-
of your vehicle together with the
tions. Doing so may cause NOTE access key fob or the remote trans-
malfunctions. . The operational/non-operational mitter of another vehicle
– Keep the access key fob away setting for the keyless access function – When the access key fob is
from magnetic sources. can be changed. For the setting proce- placed near wireless communica-
– Do not leave the access key dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac- tion equipment such as a cell phone
fob near a personal computer cess function” F2-12. – When the access key fob is
or home electrical appliance. . For detailed information about the placed near a metallic object
operation method for the push-button – When metallic accessories are
– Do not leave the access key
ignition switch while the keyless ac- attached to the access key fob
fob near a battery charger or
cess function is switched to the non-
any electrical accessories. – When carrying the access key fob
operational mode, refer to “Access key
– Do not apply metallic window with electronic appliances such as a
fob – if access key fob does not operate
tint or attach metallic objects laptop computer
properly” F9-17.
to the windows. . The keyless access with push-but- – When the battery of the access
ton start system uses weak radio key fob is discharged
– Do not fit non genuine acces-
sories or parts. waves. The status of the access key . The access key fob is always com-
fob and environmental conditions may municating with the vehicle and is
. If the access key fob is dropped, continuously using the battery.
the integrated emergency key in- interfere with the communication be-
tween the access key fob and the Although the life of the battery varies
side may become loose. Be care- depending on the operating conditions,
ful not to lose the emergency key. vehicle under the following conditions,
and it may not be possible to lock or it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the
. When traveling in an airplane, do unlock the doors or start the engine. battery becomes fully discharged, re-
not press the button of the ac- – When operating near a facility place it with a new one.
cess key fob. If any button of the where strong radio waves are trans- . If an access key fob is lost, it is
access key fob is pressed, radio mitted, such as a broadcast station recommended that all of the remaining
waves are emitted and may affect access key fobs be reregistered. For
– CONTINUED –
. For a spare access key fob, contact a – Inside the glove box
SUBARU dealer. – Inside the door trim pocket
. Up to 7 access key fobs can be – On the rear seat
registered for one vehicle. – In the cargo area
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the storage spaces inside the vehicle, If you do, the following situations
such as the door pocket, dashboard, may occur.
inside the corner of the cargo area. – The access key fob is mistakenly
Vibrations may damage the key fob or locked inside the vehicle.
turn on the switch, possibly resulting in – A false warning issues although
a lockout. no malfunction actually occurs.
. After the vehicle battery is dis- – No warning issues even when
charged or replaced, initialization of any malfunction occurs. 1) Antenna
the steering lock system may be re- 2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32
quired to start the engine. In this case, in (40 to 80 cm))
perform the following procedure to & Locking and unlocking by
initialize the steering lock. holding the access key fob
S02AP20
(1) Turn the push-button ignition When the access key fob is carried within
switch to the “OFF” position. For the operating range, the doors and the rear
details, refer to “Switching power gate can be locked/unlocked just by
status” F3-7. touching the door handle.
(2) Open and close the driver’s
door. NOTE
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec- The vehicle can also be locked/un-
onds. locked with the remote keyless entry
system. For details, refer to “Remote
When the steering is locked, the initi- keyless entry system” F2-17.
alization is completed.
. Do not leave the access key fob in 1) LED indicator
the following places.
When the access key fob is within either of function when the access key fob is . Unlock and lock rear gate
the operating ranges of the front doors, the inside the vehicle. However, depending
LED indicator on the access key fob on the status of the access key fob and NOTE
flashes. When the keyless access func- the environmental conditions, the ac- . It is not possible to lock the doors 2
tions are disabled, the LED indicator does cess key fob may be locked inside the and rear gate using the keyless access
not flash unless a button on the access key vehicle. Before locking the vehicle, function when the push-button ignition
fob is pressed. make sure that you have the access switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
key fob. Refer to “Switching power status” F3-
NOTE . When the battery of the access key 7.
. If the access key fob is placed too fob is discharged, or when operating it . If the door handle is gripped with a
close to the vehicle body, the keyless in a location with strong radio waves or gloved hand, the door lock may not be
access functions may not operate noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power released.
properly. If they do not operate prop- plant, broadcast station or an area . If the door lock sensor is touched
erly, repeat the operation from further where wireless equipment is used), or three times or more repeatedly, the
away. while talking on a cell phone, the system will ignore the sensor opera-
. If the access key fob is placed near operating ranges may be reduced, or tion.
the ground or in an elevated location the keyless access function may not . When performing the locking proce-
from the ground, even if it is in the operate. dure too quickly, locking may not have
indicated operating range, the keyless In such a case, perform the procedure been completed. After performing the
access function may not operate prop- described in “Locking and unlocking” locking procedure, it is recommended
erly. F9-17. to pull the REAR door handle to confirm
. When the access key fob is within . The doors may lock or unlock when that the doors have been locked.
the operating range, it is possible for the car is being washed or exposed to a . If any of the doors (or the rear gate)
anyone, even someone who is not significant amount of water that con- are not fully closed, the following will
carrying the access key fob, to operate tacts the door handle while the key fob occur to alert you that the doors (or the
the keyless access function. Note that is still in the operating range. rear gate) are not properly closed.
the keyless access function can be – an electronic chirp sounds five
operated only by the door handle, door ! How to lock and unlock times.
S02AP2002
lock sensor, rear gate opener button or It is possible to perform the following – the hazard warning flashers flash
rear lock button in the operating range operations when you are carrying the five times.
in which the access key fob is detected. access key fob. . It is possible to lock the doors even
. It is not possible to lock the doors . Lock and unlock the doors when one of the doors is open. After
and rear gate using the keyless access
– CONTINUED –
performing the locking procedure, ! Locking with the door lock sensor ! Locking with the rear lock button
close the opened door or rear gate to S02AP200201 S02AP200202
lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate by using the
keyless access function, it is not pos-
sible to unlock doors and/or the rear
gate by using the keyless access func-
tion.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking the
access key fob in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation and the volume of the
audible signal can be changed by your 1) Door lock sensor 1) Rear lock button
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with Carry the access key fob, close all doors Carry the access key fob, close all doors
the combination meter display (color including the rear gate, and touch the door including the rear gate and press the rear
LCD), the setting of the hazard warning lock sensor on the door handle. All doors lock button. The rear gate and all doors will
flasher operation can be changed by including the rear gate will be locked. Also, be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
operating the combination meter dis- an electronic chirp will sound once and the sound once and the hazard warning
play (color LCD). For details, refer to hazard warning flashers will flash once. flashers will flash once.
“Keyless Entry System” F3-41.
Carry the access key fob, and grip the 1) Rear gate opener button
following door handle. Carry the access key fob, and press the
. The driver’s door handle: rear gate opener button. Either only the
Either only the driver’s door will unlock, or rear gate will unlock, or all doors will
all doors will unlock. unlock. Also, an electronic chirp will sound
. The front passenger’s door handle: twice and the hazard warning flashers will
All doors and rear gate will be unlocked. flash twice.
– CONTINUED –
& Unlock using PIN Code Ac- ! Preparation for registering a PIN ! Registration for a PIN code
cess code
S02AP2101
S02AP2102
For example, to register “32468” as the
S02AP21
When all doors including the rear gate are 1. Turn off the ignition switch. PIN code, perform the following proce-
locked, you can unlock the doors (includ- 2. Close all doors (including rear gate). dure.
ing rear gate) without a key by pressing the 3. Press and hold the “ ” button on the 1. Press the rear lock button three times.
rear lock button. access key fob. Then all doors (including 2. After a chirp sounds once, press the
rear gate) will be locked. rear lock button twice.
4. Keep the “ ” button pressed, and 3. After a chirp sounds once, press the
press the rear lock button within 5 seconds rear lock button four times.
after step 3. 4. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press
5. Press and hold the rear lock button for the rear lock button six times.
more than 5 seconds. Confirm a chirp 5. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press
sound. the rear lock button eight times.
6. Release the “ ” button and rear lock 6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
button. approximately 30 seconds after the chirp
7. Press the “ ” button on the access key starts sounding intermittently.
fob while the chirp sounds. 7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.
Then the chirp will stop and the prepara- Then the PIN code will be registered.
1) Rear lock button tion is complete.
NOTE NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds
key fob is accidentally left in the of step 6 to end the preparation mode
vehicle. It is recommended that a 5- and move on to the registration stage.
digit security code (PIN code) be regis- Unless the “ ” button is pressed within
tered. 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code
registration will be canceled.
NOTE . The PIN code cannot be deleted & Power saving function
. Press the rear lock button ten times while the keyless access function is S02AP23
The keyless access function will be dis-
to enter “0”. disabled by operating the access key
. Change the PIN code frequently to fob.
abled in the following cases to protect the 2
access key fob battery and the vehicle
protect your vehicle from theft. . Reregister the PIN code in the fol- battery.
. If you have lent your vehicle to lowing case.
. Case 1: When the keyless access
another person, confirm that the PIN – when you forget the PIN code
function and the remote keyless entry
code has not been changed or deleted. – when you want to change the PIN system have not been used for 2 weeks
If the PIN code has been changed or code or longer while all doors are locked
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the ! Unlocking Operate one of the following items to
S02AP2103
registration procedure, press the “ ” Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis- recover the keyless access function:
or “ ” button on the access key fob. tration for a PIN code”. – Unlock the doors by operating any
Then, start over from the procedure procedure other than gripping the front
described in “Preparation for register- NOTE passenger’s door handle
ing a PIN code”. . You cannot unlock by PIN Code – Lock the doors
. To protect your vehicle from theft, Access in the following cases. – Open a door and then close it
you cannot register a string of the same – when the access key fob is within
five numbers together, such as the operating ranges . Case 2: When the access key fob has
“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code. – when the ignition switch is in the been left in the operating range for 10
. Do not register your vehicle license “ACC” or “ON” position minutes or longer while all doors are
plate number or simple numbers such . If you make an operation error dur- locked
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code. ing the unlocking procedure, start over
Doing so will increase the risk of Operate one of the following items to
with the unlocking procedure after recover the keyless access function:
vehicle theft. waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. When you try to register “22222”, the – Unlock the doors by gripping the
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a
registered PIN code will be deleted. You door handle
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes
cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code are entered five times continuously. If – Unlock the doors by pressing the
Access until a new code is registered. this occurs, you cannot unlock the rear gate opener button
. After registering a new PIN code, doors by PIN Code Access for 5 – Lock the doors by touching the door
make sure that you can unlock the minutes. lock sensor
doors using the PIN code. – Lock or unlock the doors by using
– CONTINUED –
the remote keyless entry system and push-button start system will not be . To start the engine while the func-
– Lock or unlock the doors by using available. tions are disabled, perform the proce-
the power door locking switch To cancel the power save mode, press one dure described in “Starting engine”
– Open either of the front doors of the buttons on the access key fob. F9-18.
! Disabling functions
& Power saving function of ac- & Disabling keyless access S02AP0701
neously for more than 5 seconds. performed, push “ ” of the power door tion was disabled.
locking switch twice while the door is open. – When disabling by operating the
A chirp sound will be heard, and the driver’s door: a chirp will not be
7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is
function will be disabled.
performed, close and open the driver’s heard 2
! By operating the driver’s door door once. – When disabling by operating the
S02AP070101
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is access key fob: a chirp will be heard
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the
door. performed, close the door.
& Selecting audible signal op-
A chirp sound will be heard, and the eration
functions will be disabled. S02AP12
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
NOTE give you an audible signal when the doors
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
locking switch slowly. If the switch is the audible signal off. For more details,
pressed quickly, the functions may not contact a SUBARU dealer.
be disabled. NOTE
! Enabling functions For models with the combination meter
S02AP0702
When the procedure to disable the func- display (color LCD), the setting can be
tions is performed again, a chirp sound will changed by operating the combination
be heard, and the functions are enabled. meter display (color LCD). For details,
refer to “Vehicle Setting” F3-41.
2. Push “ ” of the power door locking
switch. NOTE
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is . The keyless access function will be & Warning chimes and warning
performed, open the driver’s door. enabled only if you perform the proce- indicator
dure in the same manner you disabled S02AP06
4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is The keyless access with push-button start
the function (for example, when dis-
performed, push “ ” of the power door system sounds a warning chime and
abling by operating the driver’s door,
locking switch twice while the door is open. flashes the access key warning indicator
the function will not be enabled even if
5. Within 10 seconds after step 4 is on the combination meter in order to
you operate the access key fob).
performed, close and open the driver’s minimize improper operations and help
. Press the push-button ignition
door twice. protect your vehicle from theft.
switch if you do not know the proce-
6. Within 10 seconds after step 5 is dure in which the keyless access func- For details, refer to “Warning chimes and
– CONTINUED –
warning indicator of the keyless access & Certification for keyless ac- . Canada-spec. models
with push-button start system” F3-25. cess with push-button start
system
& When access key fob does S02AP14
. U.S.-spec. models
not operate properly
S02AP08
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key FCC ID: HYQ14AHK
fob does not operate properly” F9-17. FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-1
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
& Replacing battery of access
key fob CAUTION
S02AP09
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key FCC WARNING
fob” F11-43.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
& Replacing access key fob sponsible for compliance could void
S02AP13
Access key fobs can be replaced at the user’s authority to operate the
SUBARU dealers. For more details, con- equipment.
tact a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
One key that has already been registered . For models without “keyless access – Canada-spec. models
is required in order to register a new key. with push-button start system”:
– U.S.-spec. models
NOTE
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2
still remains in the memory of the
vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se- CAUTION
curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code
FCC WARNING
should be erased from the memory. To
Changes or modifications not ex-
erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys
pressly approved by the party re-
that will be used are required.
sponsible for compliance could void
For details about new key registration the user’s authority to operate the
and erasing the lost key’s ID code, equipment.
contact your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
& Certification for immobilizer This device complies with part 15 of the
system FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
S02AB05
. For models with “keyless access following two conditions: (1) This de-
with push-button start system”: vice may not cause harmful interfer-
Refer to “Certification for keyless access ence, and (2) this device must accept
with push-button start system” F2-14. any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION 2
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
Access key fob
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
1) Lock/arm button
a cloth immediately.
2) Unlock/disarm button
. When you carry the remote trans- 3) Rear gate unlock button
mitter on an airplane, do not 4) PANIC button
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
– CONTINUED –
tions. The system’s operable distance will & Locking the doors
be shorter in areas near a facility or S02AQ01
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors
electronic equipment emitting strong radio and rear gate. An electronic chirp will
waves such as a power plant, broadcast sound once and the hazard warning
station, TV tower, or remote controller of flashers will flash once.
home electronic appliances.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not
NOTE fully closed, the following will occur to alert
. For models with “keyless access you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not
with push-button start system”, the properly closed.
remote keyless entry system will not . an electronic chirp sounds five times.
be activated when the push-button . the hazard warning flashers flash five
ignition switch is in any position other times.
Transmitter than the “OFF” position.
1) Lock/arm button . For models without “keyless access When you close the door, it will automati-
2) Unlock/disarm button with push-button start system”, the cally lock and then the following will occur.
3) Rear gate unlock button remote keyless entry system will not . an electronic chirp sounds once.
4) PANIC button be activated when the key is inserted in . the hazard warning flashers flash once.
The remote keyless entry system has the the ignition switch.
following functions. . The hazard warning flashers will & Unlocking the doors
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and flash once or twice when the access S02AQ02
The operable distance of the remote key- flashers in the above cases can be set NOTE
less entry system is approximately 30 feet to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.
If the interval between the first and
(10 meters). However, this distance will Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
second presses of the unlock/disarm
vary depending on environmental condi- tails.
button (for unlocking of all of the doors
and the rear gate) is extremely short, & Sounding a panic alarm
the system may not respond. S02AQ08
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once. 2
& Unlocking the rear gate The horn will sound and the hazard
S02AQ05
Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock warning flashers will flash.
the rear gate. To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
An electronic chirp will sound twice and the button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
hazard warning flashers will flash twice. button on the remote transmitter is
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
& Vehicle finder function after approximately 30 seconds.
S02AQ07
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
& Setting audible signal opera-
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet tion (models without “keyless 2. Hold down “ ” of the power door
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the access with push-button start locking switch.
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second system”) 3. While holding down “ ” of the power
S02AQ09
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to Using an electronic chirp, the system will door locking switch, pull the key out and re-
sound once and its hazard warning give you an audible signal when the doors insert it into the ignition switch at least 6
flashers to flash three times. lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn times within 10 seconds after Step 2.
the audible signal off. 4. Open and close the driver’s door once
NOTE within 10 seconds after Step 3.
If the interval between presses is too Perform the following steps to deactivate
the audible signal. You can also use the 5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3
short when you press the lock/arm
same steps to restore the function. times to indicate completion of the setting.
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the 1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all Your SUBARU dealer can perform the
remote transmitter. doors and the rear gate. above procedure for you. Also, for models
with a combination meter display (color
LCD), the setting can be changed using
the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle
Setting” F3-41.
– CONTINUED –
! U.S.-spec. models
S02AQ1801
FCC ID: CWTB1G077
FCC ID: CWTD1G049
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
! Mexico-spec. models Door locks – Insert the key into the ignition
S02AQ1803
S02AC
switch and turn the ignition switch
& Locking and unlocking from to “ON”.
2
the outside For details about the alarm system,
S02AC01
NOTE refer to “Alarm system” F2-24.
If you unlock the driver’s door with a ! How to lock and unlock the vehicle
key (including an emergency key) and by using the key
open the door while the alarm system is S02AC0101
armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
. Models with “keyless access with
IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814 push-button start system”:
SUBARU – Press any button on the access
MODEL: TB1G077 key fob (except when the access
key fob battery is discharged).
IFETEL RLVSUTD15-1815 – Press the push-button ignition
SUBARU switch to “ACC”.
MODEL: TD1G049 – Carry the access key fob and
perform either of the following pro- 1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.
cedures. 2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.
– Grip the front door handle In this case, only the driver’s side door is
– Press the rear gate opener locked.
button
NOTE
. Models without “keyless access
Models with “keyless access with
with push-button start system”:
push-button start system”:
– Press any button on the remote
The emergency key is directional. If the
transmitter (except when the trans-
key cannot be inserted, change the
mitter battery is discharged).
– CONTINUED –
direction that the grooved side is facing ! Locking using power door lock- & Locking and unlocking from
and insert it again. ing switch the inside
S02AC010202 S02AC02
! How to lock the vehicle without ! How to use the lock lever
using the key S02AC0202
S02AC0102
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
! Locking using lock lever
S02AC010201
belts and child restraints, locking . The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
the doors reduces the chance of “ON” position (models with “keyless ac-
being thrown out of the vehicle in an cess with push-button start system”)
accident. 2
NOTE
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is acciden- . When leaving the vehicle, make sure
tally opened, and intruders from you are holding the key before locking
unexpectedly opening doors and the doors.
entering your vehicle. . The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
This function’s operational/non-opera-
! How to operate the power door tional setting can be changed by a
locking switches SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
S02AC0203
All doors and the rear gate can be locked Example dealer for details.
and unlocked using the power door locking 1) Press to lock
switches located at the driver’s side and 2) Press to unlock ! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-
the front passenger’s side doors. vention function
S02AC0602
NOTE When the system is set so that it does not
Make sure that you do not leave the key operate, the doors are locked by the
inside the vehicle before locking the following operation.
doors from the outside using the power . If the lock lever is turned to the front
door locking switches. (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
& Key lock-in prevention func- driver’s door is locked.
tion . If the spare key is used to lock the
S02AC06
Under the following conditions, all the driver’s door from the outside of the
doors will not lock when the door lock vehicle, the door is locked.
switch is pushed with the driver door open.
. The key is still in the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
– CONTINUED –
& Alarm system operation The notifications regarding the map NOTE
When the alarm system is armed, it is
S02AF01 lights, dome light and cargo area light
are deactivated as the factory setting. A
triggered by the opening any of the doors
SUBARU dealer can activate the sys- 2
or the rear gate.
tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
The alarm system will activate the follow- details.
ing alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds. & Arming the system
S02AF04
. The hazard warning flashers will flash The alarm system becomes armed when
for 30 seconds. the following operation is performed.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
If any of the doors or the rear gate remains equipped) and turn the ignition switch to
open after the 30-second period, the horn the “OFF” position.
will continue to sound for a maximum of 3
2. Carry the key and get out of the
minutes. If the door or the rear gate is Security indicator light
vehicle.
closed while the horn is sounding, the horn
will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 3. Lock the doors using any of the All doors and the rear gate will lock, an
seconds. following methods. electronic chirp will sound once, the
. Locking using the remote keyless hazard warning flashers will flash once,
NOTE entry system. For details, refer to and the security indicator light will start
The alarm system can be set to trigger “Remote keyless entry system” F2-17. flashing rapidly.
the illumination of the following interior . Locking using the keyless access
function (if equipped). For details, refer 4. Approximately 30 seconds later, the
lights.
to “Locking with the door lock sensor” system will enter surveillance state.
. Map lights (illuminates only when
the door interlock switch is in the F2-8. When the system is in surveillance state,
“DOOR” position) . Locking using the power door lock- the security indicator light will then flash
. Dome light (illuminates only when ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” using power door locking switch” F2- onds), indicating that the system has been
position) 22. armed for surveillance.
. Cargo area light (illuminates only
when the cargo area light switch is in
the “DOOR” position)
– CONTINUED –
NOTE – The ignition switch is turned to battery is too weak), you can disarm the
. The system can be armed even if the the “ON” position (models without system without using the access key fob/
engine hood, windows and/or moon- “keyless access with push-button remote transmitter.
roof are open. Always make sure that start system”). The system can be disarmed if you turn the
they are fully closed before arming the – Push-button ignition switch is ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF” to
system. turned to the “ACC” position (mod- the “ON” position with a registered key/
. When arming the system, if any of els with “keyless access with push- access key fob.
the doors or the rear gate is not fully button start system”).
closed, an electronic chirp sounds five NOTE
times, the hazard warning flashers & Disarming the system For models with “keyless access with
S02AF05
flash five times to alert you that the Perform either of the following procedures. push-button start system”, if the ac-
doors (or the rear gate) are not properly . Briefly press a button (for less than 2 cess key fob battery is discharged,
closed. When you close the door, doors seconds) on the access key fob/remote perform the procedure described in
will automatically lock and the system transmitter. “Switching power status” F9-17. In
will automatically arm in 30 seconds. such a case, replace the battery im-
. Carry the access key fob and perform
. The 30-second standby time can be mediately. Refer to “Replacing battery
either of the following procedures (models
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- of access key fob” F11-43.
with “keyless access with push-button
formed by your SUBARU dealer. start system”).
. If any of the following actions is & Alarm system setting
– Grip the front door handle.
done during the standby period, the S02AF11
system will not switch to the surveil- – Press the rear gate opener button. To change the setting of your vehicle’s
lance state. – Unlock using the PIN code access. alarm system for activation or deactiva-
– Doors (including the rear gate) tion, do the following.
The flashing of the security indicator light 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
are unlocked using the access key will then change slowly (once approxi-
fob/remote transmitter. “Disarming the system” F2-26.
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
– Doors (including the rear gate) proximately every 2 seconds), indicating 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
are unlocked using the keyless that the alarm system has been disarmed. doors and the rear gate.
access function (models with “key- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
less access with push-button start ! Emergency disarming position.
S02AF0501
system”). If you cannot disarm the system using the 4. Hold down “ ” of the driver’s power
– Any door (including the rear gate) access key fob/transmitter (i.e. the trans- door locking switch, open the driver’s door
is opened. mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter within the following 1 second, and wait 10
seconds without releasing the switch. The & If you have accidentally trig- & Valet mode
setting will then be changed as follows. gered the alarm system When you choose the valet mode, the
S02AF06
S02AF03
. Type A combination meter ! To stop the alarm
alarm system does not operate. In valet 2
S02AF0301 mode, the remote transmitter is used only
Setting Combination Do any of the following operations: for locking and unlocking the doors and
Horn
status meter display . Press any button on the access key fob/ rear gate and panic activation.
Activate ALon Once remote transmitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” To enter the valet mode, change the
Deactivate ALoF Twice setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
position (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”). deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm system
. Type B combination meter setting” F2-26. The security indicator light
. Turn the push-button ignition to the will continue to flash once every 3 seconds
Setting Combination Horn “ACC” position (models with “keyless indicating that the system is in the valet
status meter display access with push-button start system”). mode.
Activate AL ON Once
NOTE To exit valet mode, change the setting of
Deactivate AL OFF Twice
Only registered keys will stop the your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
NOTE alarm. If the immobilizer transponder mode. Refer to “Alarm system setting” F2-
You may have the above setting change is not registered, the alarm will not 26.
done by your SUBARU dealer. stop.
. Passenger’s side power window ! Operating the window in the same direction simultaneously
switches: S02AH0702
. With one-touch auto up and down for a few seconds.
feature: Either of the operations described
above may cause the power window 2
breaker to operate making it impossible
to open or close the window. Be sure to
initialize the power windows. If they are
not initialized, the one-touch auto up/
down function will not operate. Refer to
“Initialization of power window with
one-touch auto up/down function”
F2-30.
. Without one-touch auto up and down
feature:
Each passenger’s window can be con-
trolled by the power window switch located 1) Automatically close*
on the door. 2) Close
3) Open
4) Automatically open*
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the
switch to opposite side.
NOTE
Avoid the following.
. After the driver’s window is fully
closed or fully opened, the switch is
continuously operated in the same 1) Close
direction for a few seconds. 2) Open
. After the windows for three or more
seats are fully closed or fully opened,
each switch is continuously operated
– CONTINUED –
! Anti-entrapment function (windows few seconds after the anti-entrapment & Initialization of power window
with one-touch auto up/down func- function operates. with one-touch auto up/down
tion) function
S02AH0703 ! Off delay function (windows with
While closing the driver’s and front pas- one-touch auto up/down function)
S02AH06
If the power window automatic function
senger’s windows automatically, if the S02AH0705
The front windows can be operated for (one-touch auto up and down function)
window senses a substantial enough
approximately 45 seconds even after the does not operate properly, operate each
object trapped between the window and
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or window according to the following proce-
the window frame, it automatically moves
“OFF” position. If a front door is opened dure in order to initialize the power window
down slightly and stops.
within 45 seconds, the off delay function is system.
If a foreign object is caught while the
canceled. 1. Close the door.
driver’s window or passenger’s window is
opening automatically, the window will ! Locking the passengers’ windows 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
stop.
S02AH0704 position.
3. Open the window completely and then
CAUTION press and hold down the power window
switch for approximately 1 second.
. Never attempt to test this func- 4. Close the window completely and then
tion using fingers, hands or other pull and hold the power window switch for
parts of your body. approximately 1 second.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
NOTE 1) Lock
. If a window detects an impact similar 2) Unlock
to that caused by trapping an object (for
example, when the vehicle encounters When the lock switch is in the lock position,
a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment the rear passenger’s window switches on
function may operate. the driver side door and the passengers’
. The window cannot be operated for a window switches cannot be operated.
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if 1) Open
falling snow or extremely cold 2) Close
conditions have caused it to 1) Up
2) Down To open or close the moonroof using the
freeze shut.
automatic function, press and hold the
. The anti-entrapment function To raise the moonroof, press and hold the switch toward the open/close side and
does not operate when the moon- switch in the up side and release. To lower release.
roof is being tilted down. Be sure the moonroof, press and hold the switch in
To stop the moonroof halfway, press a
to confirm that it is safe to do so the down side. switch on the moonroof switch.
before tilting the moonroof down.
NOTE NOTE
. If the moonroof does not close,
Release the switch after the moonroof
have the system checked by a . After washing the vehicle or after it
has been raised or has been lowered
SUBARU dealer. rains, wipe away water on the roof prior
completely. Pressing the switch con-
to opening the moonroof to prevent
tinuously may cause damage to the
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding drops of water from falling into the
moonroof.
functions. passenger compartment.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
The sunshade can be slid forward or
Never attempt to test this function backward by hand while the moonroof is
using fingers, hands or other parts closed.
of your body. If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade
also moves back.
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)............. 3-31 X-mode indicator (if equipped) .............................. 3-47
Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped) ....... 3-31 Clock.................................................................... 3-47
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light Multi-function display (color LCD)
(models with LED headlights).............................. 3-31 (if equipped) ....................................................... 3-47
LED headlight warning light (models with LED Features ............................................................... 3-48
headlights).......................................................... 3-31 Welcome screen ................................................... 3-48
Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/ Self-check screen ................................................. 3-48
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator
light (if equipped)................................................ 3-31 Interruption screen ............................................... 3-49
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ............ 3-31 Basic operation .................................................... 3-49
Headlight indicator light (if equipped).................... 3-31 Basic screens....................................................... 3-50
Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator/ Setting screen ...................................................... 3-57
Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator How to get the source code using the open
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-31 source............................................................... 3-62
X-mode indicator (if equipped) .............................. 3-32 Clock...................................................................... 3-62
Hill descent control indicator (if equipped) ............ 3-32 Preparation for clock adjustment setting ............... 3-63
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)............. 3-32 Setting the clock automatically ............................. 3-63
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) .................. 3-32 Setting the clock manually.................................... 3-63
RAB warning indicator (if equipped) ...................... 3-32 Regulatory information ......................................... 3-64
RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped) .................... 3-32 Light control switch ............................................. 3-65
Icy road surface warning indicator (if equipped) .... 3-32 Precautions and tips............................................. 3-65
Combination meter display (color LCD) Headlights ............................................................ 3-65
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-33 High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................... 3-67
Basic operation..................................................... 3-34 Headlight flasher .................................................. 3-67
Welcome screen and Good-bye screen.................. 3-34 High beam assist function (if equipped) ................ 3-67
Warning screen..................................................... 3-35 Daytime running light system ............................... 3-70
Telltale screen....................................................... 3-35 Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
Basic screens ....................................................... 3-36 (if equipped) ....................................................... 3-71
Menu screens ....................................................... 3-38 Headlight beam leveler (models with LED
Multi-function display (black and white) ............. 3-42 headlights) ......................................................... 3-72
Driving information display ................................... 3-43 Fog light switch (if equipped).............................. 3-72
Outside temperature indicator ............................... 3-46
Steering responsive fog lights system Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped).......... 3-78
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-72 Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink®
Turn signal lever ................................................... 3-74 (if equipped) ...................................................... 3-79
One-touch lane changer ........................................ 3-74 Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-86
Wiper and washer ................................................. 3-74 Defogger and deicer (if equipped) ...................... 3-87
Windshield wiper and washer switches ................. 3-76 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel .............................. 3-89
Rear window wiper and washer switch .................. 3-77 Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) ......... 3-89
Mirrors ................................................................... 3-78 Horn ....................................................................... 3-90
Inside mirror ......................................................... 3-78
3-4 Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”) 3-5
3-6 Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
The light turns off immediately under the Push-button ignition switch cannot be operated.
following conditions. . Even when the access key fob is
(models with “keyless access outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
with push-button start sys- close to the glass, it may be possible to
. when all doors and the rear gate are tem”) switch the power or to start the engine.
locked using the remote keyless entry S03BG . Do not leave the access key fob in
transmitter & Safety precautions the following places. It may become
S03BG04
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-3. impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start. It
& Operating range for push- may also cause a false warning to issue
button start system although no malfunction actually oc-
S03BG01 curs, or not to issue a warning when
any malfunction occurs.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– In the cargo area
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key fob battery is dis-
charged, perform the procedure de-
scribed in “Access key fob – if access
1) Antenna key fob does not operate properly” F9-
2) Operating range 17. In such a case, replace the battery
immediately. Refer to “Replacing bat-
NOTE tery of access key fob” F11-43.
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the anten-
nas inside the vehicle, the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start
Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”) 3-7
& Switching power status illuminates in orange. with oil or other contaminants. It
S03BG02
may cause a malfunction.
Power Indicator color Operation
. If the push-button ignition switch
status does not operate smoothly, stop
Power is turned the operation. Contact a SUBARU
OFF Turned off off. dealer immediately. 3
The following . If the push-button ignition switch
systems can be does not illuminate even when
used:
ACC Orange audio and ac- the instrument panel illumination
cessory power is turned on, have the vehicle
outlet. inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
Orange . If the vehicle was left in the hot
(while engine is sun for a long time, the surface of
stopped) All electrical
1) Operation indicator ON systems can be the push-button ignition switch
Turned off used. may get hot. Be careful not to
2) Push-button ignition switch (while engine is
running) burn yourself.
The power is switched every time the
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the CAUTION NOTE
driver’s seat. . When operating the push-button
. When the push-button ignition ignition switch, firmly press it all the
2. Shift the select lever (CVT models)/the switch is left in “ON” (while the way.
shift lever (MT models) into the “P”/“N” engine is not running) or “ACC” . If the push-button ignition switch is
position. for a long time, it may result in pressed quickly, the power may not
3. Press the push-button ignition switch vehicle battery discharge. turn on or off.
without depressing the brake pedal. Every . Do not spill drinks or other liquids
time the button is pressed, the power is on the push-button ignition
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”, switch. It may cause a malfunc-
“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is tion.
stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation . Do not touch the push-button
indicator on the push-button ignition switch ignition switch with a hand soiled
– CONTINUED –
. If the indicator light on the push- Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges
button ignition switch flashes in green S03AB S03AD
when the push-button ignition switch is NOTE
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition Some of the meters and gauges on the
switch while turning the steering wheel combination meter use liquid-crystal
left and right. displays. You will find their indications
hard to see if you wear polarized
! Battery drainage prevention func- glasses.
tion
S03BG0201
When the push-button ignition switch is left & Speedometer
in the “ACC” or “ON” position for approxi- S03AD03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition
speed.
switch will be automatically switched to
“OFF” to prevent the battery from going
dead. & Tachometer
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn S03AD06
other drivers when you have to park your The tachometer shows the engine speed
& When access key fob does in thousands of revolutions per minute.
not operate properly vehicle under emergency conditions. The
S03BG03 hazard warning flasher works regardless
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key of the position of the ignition switch.
CAUTION
fob does not operate properly” F9-17.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, Do not operate the engine with the
push the hazard warning button on the pointer of the tachometer in the red
instrument panel. All the turn signal lights zone. In this range, fuel injection will
and the turn signal indicator lights will be cut by the engine control module
flash. To turn off the flasher, push the to protect the engine from overrev-
button again. ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
NOTE is reduced below the red zone.
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
1) TRIP RESET switch result.
2) Type A combination meter
3) Type B combination meter
1) TRIP RESET switch
This meter displays the odometer when 2) Type A combination meter
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. 3) Type B combination meter
The odometer shows the total distance This meter displays the two trip meters
that the vehicle has been driven. when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
NOTE The trip meter shows the distance that the
If you press the TRIP RESET switch vehicle has been driven since you last set
when the ignition switch is in the it to zero.
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
odometer/trip meter will light up. The display can be switched as shown in
The indicators will turn off when: the following sequence by pressing the
. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper- TRIP RESET switch.
ated for approximately 10 seconds.
. The driver’s door is opened and then
– CONTINUED –
S03AJ
upward, the illumination brightness & Initial illumination for system
becomes the maximum and the auto- check
matic dimming function does not work S03AE29
Several of the warning and indicator lights
at all.
illuminate when the ignition switch is
. The brightness setting is not can-
initially turned to the “ON” position. This
celed even when the ignition switch is
permits checking the operation of the
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
bulbs.
& Auto dimmer cancel function Apply the parking brake and turn the
(if equipped) ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
S03AJ01 the system check, several of the following
When the ambient light is bright, the lights illuminate and then turn off after
illumination brightness is set to the max- several seconds or after the engine has
imum regardless of the position of the started.
control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust
The illumination brightness of the instru- : Seatbelt warning light
the illumination brightness by using the
ment panel illuminates under the following (The seatbelt warning light turns off
control dial. When the ambient light is dark,
conditions. only when the driver fastens the seat-
you can dim the illumination brightness as
. when the light switch is in the “ ” or belt.)
described above.
“ ” position : Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
. when the light control switch is in the The operational/non-operational setting
light
“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi- and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
nate automatically function can be changed by your SUBARU
only when the front seat passenger
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
fastens the seatbelt.)
You can adjust the illumination brightness details.
for better visibility. : SRS airbag system warning light
To brighten, turn the control dial upward. ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
To darken, turn the control dial downward. ON indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
! Operation operation that follows the 6-second again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
S03AE0101
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ warning after turning ON the ignition “Manual seat” F1-5.
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when switch. When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the If the seatbelt warning device for the front
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” passenger’s seat does not function cor-
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
flash for several seconds, to warn that the front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer. deactivated even when the front passen-
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take
sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front the following actions.
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
NOTE . Ensure that no article is placed on the
device for the front passenger’s seat will
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- seat other than a child restraint system and
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened its child occupant, although we strongly
occupant detection system monitors
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning recommend that all children sit in the rear
whether or not there is a passenger on
device operates as follows according seat properly restrained.
the front passenger’s seat.
to the vehicle speed. . Ensure that there is no article left in the
Observe the following precautions. Failure
– At speeds lower than approxi- seatback pocket.
to do so may prevent the device from
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) functioning correctly or cause the device to . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
The warning light(s) for unfastened fail. sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seatbelt(s) will alternate between seat are locked into place securely by
. Do not install any accessory such as a
steady illumination and flashing at moving the seat back and forth.
table or TV onto the seatback.
15-second intervals. The chime will . Do not store a heavy load in the If still the seatbelt warning device for front
not sound. seatback pocket. passenger’s seat does not function cor-
– At speeds higher than approxi- . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) place his/her hands or legs on the front tions described above, immediately con-
The warning light(s) for unfastened passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
seatbelt(s) will alternate between pull the seatback. tion.
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime . Do not use front seats with their back-
will sound while the warning light(s) ward-forward position and seatback not
is/are flashing. being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
. It is possible to cancel the warning
& SRS airbag system & Front passenger’s frontal air- airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
warning light bag ON and OFF indicators vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
S03AE02
S03AE03
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
WARNING is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
If the warning light exhibits any of indicator will remain off. 3
the following conditions, there may If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
be a malfunction in the seatbelt is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag airbag ON indicator will remain off while
system. Immediately take your vehi- the OFF indicator will illuminate.
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
to have the system checked. Unless position, if both the ON and OFF indicators
checked and properly repaired, the remain illuminated or off simultaneously
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS even after the system check period, the
airbag will not operate properly in system is malfunctioning. Contact your
the event of a collision, which may ON : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
increase the risk of injury. indicator spection.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
ing light indicator & CHECK ENGINE warn-
. No illumination of the warning The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ing light/Malfunction in-
light when the ignition switch is and OFF indicators show you the status of dicator light S03AE04
first turned to the “ON” position the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
. Continuous illumination of the The indicator is displayed near the map CAUTION
warning light lights.
When the ignition switch is turned to the If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
. Illumination of the warning light nates while you are driving, have
while driving “ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during your vehicle checked/repaired by
which time the system is checked. Follow- your SUBARU dealer as soon as
For details about the components mon- possible. Continued vehicle opera-
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the tion without having the emission
airbag system monitors” F1-66. control system checked and re-
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal paired as necessary could cause
– CONTINUED –
serious damage, which may not be ized SUBARU dealer immediately. & Coolant temperature
covered by your vehicle’s warranty. ! If the light is blinking low indicator light/Cool-
S03AE0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an ant temperature high
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate engine misfire condition has been de- warning light S03AE48
that there is at least one problem or tected which may damage the emission
potential problem somewhere in the emis- control system. CAUTION
sion control system. To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should do the . After turning the ignition switch
! If the light illuminates steadily following. to the “ON” position, if this
S03AE0401 indicator light/warning light be-
If the light illuminates steadily while driving . Reduce vehicle speed.
haves in any of the following
or does not turn off after the engine starts, . Avoid hard acceleration. ways, the electrical system may
an emission control system malfunction . Avoid steep uphill grades. be malfunctioning. Contact your
has been detected.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- SUBARU dealer immediately for
You should have your vehicle checked by ble. an inspection.
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as – It remains blinking in RED.
ately.
possible. – It remains illuminated in RED
NOTE The CHECK ENGINE warning light may for more than 2 seconds.
This light also illuminates when the fuel stop blinking and illuminate steadily after – It remains blinking in RED and
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. several driving trips. You should have your BLUE alternately.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, vehicle checked by an authorized . While driving, if this indicator
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning SUBARU dealer immediately. light/warning light behaves in
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating any of the following ways, take
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. the specified appropriate mea-
Remove the cap and retighten it until it sure listed below.
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with
– Blinking or illuminated in
the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap
RED:
will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-
Safely stop the vehicle as
ing light turn off immediately. It may take
soon as possible, and refer to
several driving trips. If the light does not
the emergency steps to take in
turn off, take your vehicle to your author-
the case of engine overheat-
ing. After that, have the sys- creases over the specified range, the & Charge warning light S03AE05
tem checked by your nearest indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En- At this time, the engine is close to over- If this light illuminates when the engine is
gine overheating” F9-12. heating. running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
– Blinking in RED and BLUE If the engine coolant temperature in-
alternately: creases further, the indicator light/warning If the light illuminates while driving or does 3
The electrical system may be light illuminates in RED continuously. At not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
malfunctioning. Contact your this time, the engine may be overheating. engine at the first safe opportunity and
SUBARU dealer for an inspec- check the alternator belt. If the belt is
tion. When the indicator light/warning light loose, broken or if the belt is in good
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely condition but the light remains illuminated,
This coolant temperature low indicator stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
light/coolant temperature high warning refer to the emergency steps to take in the immediately.
light has the following three functions. case of engine overheating. Refer to
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- “Engine overheating” F9-12. After that, & Oil pressure warning
cient warming up of the engine have the system checked by your nearest light S03AE06
SUBARU dealer.
. Blinking in RED indicates that the If this light illuminates when the engine is
engine is close to overheating Also, if the indicator light/warning light running, it may indicate that the engine oil
. Illumination in RED indicates overheat- often blinks in RED, the electrical system pressure is low and the lubricating system
ing condition of the engine may be malfunctioning. Contact your is not working properly.
SUBARU dealer for an inspection. If the light illuminates while driving or does
For a system check, this indicator light/
warning light illuminates in RED for ap- NOTE not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
proximately 2 seconds when the ignition engine at the first safe opportunity and
If the engine is restarted after a certain check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
switch is turned to the “ON” position. After driving condition, this indicator light/
that, this indicator light/warning light low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
warning light may illuminate in RED. at the proper level but the light remains
changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- However, this is not a malfunction if the
tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light illuminated, contact your nearest
indicator light/warning light turns off SUBARU dealer immediately.
turns off when the engine is warmed up after a short time.
sufficiently. For details about checking the engine oil
level or adding the engine oil, refer to
If the engine coolant temperature in- “Engine oil” F11-8.
– CONTINUED –
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- when the system is not operating properly. WARNING
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- bined with the low tire pressure telltale. If this light does not illuminate
sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a When the system detects a malfunction, briefly after the ignition switch is
different size than the size indicated on the the telltale will flash for approximately one turned ON or the light illuminates
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure minute and then remain continuously steadily after blinking for approxi- 3
label, you should determine the proper tire illuminated. This sequence will continue mately one minute, you should have
inflation pressure for those tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
as the malfunction exists. When the mal- tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
As an added safety feature, your vehicle function indicator is illuminated, the sys-
has been equipped with a tire pressure soon as possible.
tem may not be able to detect or signal low If this light illuminates while driving,
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
a low tire pressure telltale when one or never brake suddenly and keep
tions may occur for a variety of reasons, driving straight ahead while gradu-
more of your tires is significantly under- including the installation of replacement or
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire ally reducing speed. Then slowly
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that pull off the road to a safe place.
pressure telltale illuminates, you should prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
stop and check your tires as soon as Otherwise an accident involving
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction serious vehicle damage and serious
possible, and inflate them to the proper telltale after replacing one or more tires or
pressure. Driving on a significantly under- personal injury could occur.
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and replacement or alternate tires and wheels If this light still illuminates while
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also allow the TPMS to continue to function driving after adjusting the tire pres-
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, properly. sure, a tire may have significant
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and damage and a fast leak that causes
stopping ability. Should the warning light illuminate steadily
after blinking for approximately one min- the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
Please note that the TPMS is not a ute, have the system inspected by your a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
substitute for proper tire maintenance, nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as as soon as possible.
and it is the driver’s responsibility to possible. When a spare tire is mounted or a
maintain correct tire pressure, even if wheel rim is replaced without the
under-inflation has not reached the level original pressure sensor/transmitter
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire being transferred, the Low tire pres-
pressure telltale. sure warning light will illuminate
Your vehicle has also been equipped with steadily after blinking for approxi-
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate mately one minute. This indicates
– CONTINUED –
the TPMS is unable to monitor all and rear tires. warning light illuminate simultaneously if
four road wheels. Contact your the EBD system malfunctions. For further
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible details of the EBD system malfunction
for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light S03AE09 warning, refer to “Electronic Brake Force
or system resetting. Distribution (EBD) system warning” F3-
If the light illuminates steadily after CAUTION 21.
blinking for approximately one min- . If any of the following conditions NOTE
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU occur, we recommend that you
dealer to have the system inspected. If the warning light behavior is as
have the ABS repaired at the first described in the following conditions,
available opportunity by your the ABS may be considered normal.
SUBARU dealer. . The warning light illuminates when
CAUTION
– The warning light does not the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
The tire pressure monitoring system illuminate when the ignition position and turns off approximately 2
is NOT a substitute for manually switch is turned to the “ON” seconds after the engine has started.
checking tire pressure. The tire position. . The warning light illuminates right
pressure should be checked peri- – The warning light illuminates after the engine is started but turns off
odically (at least monthly) using a when the ignition switch is immediately, remaining off.
tire gauge. After any change to tire turned to the “ON” position, . The warning light remains illumi-
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- but it does not turn off even nated after the engine has been started,
itoring system will not re-check tire after the vehicle is started. but it turns off while driving.
inflation pressures until the vehicle . The warning light illuminates during
is first driven more than 20 mph (32 – The warning light illuminates driving, but it turns off immediately and
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- during driving. remains off.
sures, increase the vehicle speed to . When the warning light is on (and
When driving with an insufficient battery
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the the brake system warning light is
voltage such as when the engine is jump
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- off), the ABS function shuts
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures down. However, the conventional
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
are now above the severe low pres- brake system continues to oper-
and does not indicate a malfunction. When
sure threshold, the low tire pressure ate normally.
the battery becomes fully charged, the
warning light should turn off a few light will turn off.
minutes later. Therefore, be sure to The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics
install the specified size for the front Control warning light, and brake system
& Brake system If the brake system warning light should location.
warning light (red) illuminate while driving (with the parking 2. Shut down the engine, apply the
S03AE10
brake fully released and with the ignition parking brake and then restart it.
This light illuminates with the parking switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an 3. Fully release the parking brake.
brake applied while the ignition switch is indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn 4. Even if all the warning lights do not
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the brake pads. If this occurs, immediately come back on, the EBD system may have 3
parking brake is fully released. stop the vehicle at the nearest safe a possible malfunction. Drive carefully to
location and check the brake fluid level. If the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
WARNING the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in system inspected.
the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle.
. Driving with the brake system 5. If all the warning lights stay illuminated
Have the vehicle towed to the nearest
warning light on is dangerous. or come back on after approximately 2
SUBARU dealer for repair.
This indicates your brake system seconds, shut down the engine, apply the
may not be working properly. If ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution parking brake and check the brake fluid
the light remains illuminated, (EBD) system warning level.
S03AE1003
have the brakes inspected by a The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
SUBARU dealer immediately. the brake system warning light / , . If the brake fluid level is not below the
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
. If at all in doubt about whether the malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
brakes are operating properly, do and ABS warning light / illuminate
simultaneously during driving. nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
not drive the vehicle. Have your system inspected.
vehicle towed to the nearest Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function. . If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”
SUBARU dealer for repair.
However, the rear wheels will be more mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,
The brake system warning light has the prone to locking when the brakes are have the vehicle towed to the nearest
following functions. applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s SUBARU dealer for repair.
motion may therefore become somewhat ! Vacuum pressure system warning
! Brake fluid level warning S03AE1006
S03AE1002
harder to control. The brake system warning light / will
This light illuminates when the brake fluid If the brake system warning light / , illuminate when the vacuum pressure
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light sensor is malfunctioning or brake booster
the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition and ABS warning light / illuminate pressure is decreasing.
switch in the “ON” position and with the simultaneously, take the following steps. If the brake warning light continues to
parking brake fully released. 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat illuminate for several minutes after starting
– CONTINUED –
the engine, there may be a malfunction in WARNING & All-Wheel Drive warn-
the vacuum system. In this case, drive the ing light (CVT models) S03AE13
vehicle carefully and have the system When the Hill start assist warning
inspected by a SUBARU dealer. light illuminates, have the vehicle This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with
inspected at an authorized SUBARU tires of differing diameters fitted on the
& Low fuel warning light S03AE11
wheels or with an excessively low air
dealer.
The low fuel warning light illuminates when pressure in any of the tires.
the tank is nearly empty, at approximately
2.5 US gal (9.5 liters, 2.1 Imp gal). It only ! Hill start assist OFF indicator light WARNING
S03AE4702
operates when the ignition switch is in the While the Hill start assist system is
“ON” position. deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF If the AWD warning light flashes,
indicator light illuminates continuously to promptly park in a safe location then
CAUTION inform the driver that the Hill start assist check whether all four tires are the
system is not operational. same diameter and whether any of
Promptly put fuel in the tank when- the tires has a puncture or has lost
ever the low fuel warning light & Door open warning light S03AE12
air pressure for some other reason.
illuminates. Engine misfires as a Continuing to drive with the AWD
result of an empty tank could cause The warning light illuminates if any door or warning light flashing can lead to
damage to the engine. the rear gate is not fully closed. This powertrain damage.
function is effective even if the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
& Hill start assist warning position, or the key is removed from the NOTE
ignition switch. If the temporary spare tire is used, the
light/Hill start assist
OFF indicator light For some models, only the open doors are AWD warning light may flash. Use of the
S03AE47
indicated by the warning lights. temporary spare tire should therefore
be restricted to the minimum time
! Hill start assist warning light Always make sure this light is not illumi- necessary. Replace the temporary
S03AE4701
While the engine is running, if there are nated before you start to drive. spare tire with a conventional tire as
any malfunctions in the Hill start assist soon as possible.
system, the warning light will illuminate.
& Power steering warning . The steering wheel remains in the Control system becomes unable to
light fully turned position for a long period of provide ABS control. As a result, the
S03AE53
time. Vehicle Dynamics Control system
While the engine is running, this warning also becomes inoperative, causing
light illuminates when a malfunction has At this time, there will be more resis- the warning light to illuminate.
been detected in the electric power steer- tance when steering. However this is Although both the Vehicle Dynamics 3
ing system. not a malfunction. Normal steering Control system and ABS are inop-
force will be restored after the steering erative in this case, the ordinary
CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and functions of the brake system are
the power steering control system has still available. You will be safe while
When the power steering warning an opportunity to cool down. However,
light is illuminated, there may be driving with this condition, but drive
if the power steering is operated in a carefully and have your vehicle
more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to checked at a SUBARU dealer as
assist limitation to occur too frequently, soon as possible.
the nearest SUBARU dealer and that may result in a malfunction of the
have the vehicle inspected immedi- power steering control system.
ately. NOTE
& Vehicle Dynamics Con- . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
NOTE trol warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control system itself mal-
If the steering wheel is operated in the Dynamics Control op- functions, the warning light only illumi-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
following ways, the power steering eration indicator light S03AE14
Brake System) remains fully opera-
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the tional.
system components, such as the con- ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning . The warning light illuminates when
trol computer and drive motor, from light the electronic control system of the
overheating.
S03AE1401
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
CAUTION malfunctions.
. The steering wheel is operated fre- . The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
quently and turned sharply while the The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- ing light, ABS warning light, and brake
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low tem provides its ABS control system warning light illuminate simul-
speeds, such as while frequently turn- through the electrical circuit of the taneously if the EBD system malfunc-
ing the steering wheel during parallel ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is tions. For further details of the EBD
parking. inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics system malfunction warning, refer to
– CONTINUED –
“Electronic Brake Force Distribution . The warning light illuminates when & Vehicle Dynamics Con-
(EBD) system warning” F3-21. the engine has stalled and continues to trol OFF indicator light S03AE15
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is illuminate after the engine has been
probably inoperative under any of the restarted. However, it will turn off once The light illuminates when the Vehicle
following conditions. Have your vehicle the vehicle starts moving. Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation trol system.
ately. indicator light
. The warning light does not illuminate S03AE1402 The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
The indicator light flashes during activation
when the ignition switch is turned to the probably malfunctioning under any of the
of the skid suppression function and during
“ON” position. following conditions. Have your vehicle
activation of the traction control function.
. The warning light illuminates while the checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
vehicle is running. NOTE ately.
. The light may remain illuminated for . The light does not illuminate when the
NOTE ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
a short period of time after the engine
If the warning light behavior is as has been started, especially in cold position.
described in the following examples, weather. This does not indicate the . The light does not turn off even once
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system existence of a problem. The light several seconds have elapsed after the
may be considered normal. should turn off as soon as the engine ignition switch has been turned to the “ON”
. The warning light illuminates when has warmed up. position.
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” . The indicator light illuminates when
position and turns off approximately 2 the engine has developed a problem
seconds after the engine has started. and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
. The warning light illuminates right malfunction indicator light is on.
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
. The warning light illuminates after probably malfunctioning under the follow-
the engine has started and turns off ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
while the vehicle is subsequently being at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
driven. . The light does not turn off even after the
. The warning light illuminates during lapse of several minutes (the engine has
driving, but it turns off immediately and warmed up) after the engine has started.
remains off.
– CONTINUED –
The driver’s door was opened while the Switch the push-button ignition switch to
push-button ignition switch is “ACC” (in “OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
CVT models, when the select lever is in *When exiting the vehicle, be sure to
Ding, switch the push-button ignition switch to
ding ... — — the “P” position). “OFF”.
(intermittent)
The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door Close the driver’s door.
is open.
Take out the access key fob from the
Lockout warning: vehicle, and lock the doors.
Ding Short beep — An attempt was made to lock all doors *The doors cannot be locked while the
(2 seconds) while the access key fob is left inside the access key fob is inside the vehicle.
vehicle. *A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors
will be unlocked.
Access key fob lock-in warning: Take out the access key fob from the
Short beep The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, and lock the doors.
— (2 seconds) — the push-button ignition switch is “OFF” *If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,
and the access key fob is inside the the doors cannot be locked.
vehicle.
Door ajar warning:
Beep, beep, beep, The door lock sensor is touched while the Close the doors securely and lock them.
— beep, beep — ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and *If one of the doors including the rear gate
(5 times) one of the doors including the rear gate is is opened, the doors cannot be locked.
opened.
Power warning: Return the access key fob inside the
The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
Ding Long beep (60 — carrying the access key fob, the push- switch to “OFF”.
seconds max.) button ignition switch is in a position other *If the push-button ignition switch is not
than “OFF” (in CVT models, when the switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
select lever is in the “P” position). locked.
Ding, Access key warning: Carry the access key fob, and drive the
ding ... — — The vehicle was driven while the access vehicle.
(7 seconds) key fob is not inside the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Flashes in green Steering lock warning: While turning the steering wheel right and
Ding — (15 seconds max.) The engine start procedure was per- left lightly, depress the brake pedal and
formed, but the steering is still locked. press the push-button ignition switch.
& Select lever/gear position in- rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
dicator (CVT models) out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
S03AE43 Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-36.
& Cruise control indicator & Automatic headlight Responsive Headlight (SRH)” F3-71.
light (if equipped) beam leveler warning
S03AE22
light (models with LED & Front fog light indicator
This light illuminates when the cruise light (if equipped)
control main button is pressed to activate headlights) S03AE33
S03AE25
the cruise control function. For details, This indicator light illuminates while the 3
This light illuminates when the automatic
refer to “To set cruise control” F7-48. front fog lights are illuminated.
headlight beam leveler does not operate
If this light blinks, do not use the cruise normally.
control. In addition, if it blinks frequently, & Headlight indicator
If this light illuminates during driving, have
contact your SUBARU dealer for an your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU
light (if equipped) S03AE24
cator light (if equipped) S03AE23 light (if equipped) S03AE89 NOTE
This light illuminates when vehicle speed This light illuminates when the Steering For details about the steering respon-
has been set to use the cruise control Responsive Headlight OFF switch is sive fog lights system, refer to “Steer-
function. Refer to “To set cruise control” pressed to deactivate the Steering Re- ing responsive fog lights system” F3-
F7-48. sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes 72.
when a malfunction occurs in the Steering
Responsive Headlight. Refer to “Steering
– CONTINUED –
! Steering responsive fog lights & BSD/RCTA warning in- & RAB OFF indicator light
warning indicator dicator (if equipped) S03AE80 (if equipped) S03AE92
S03AE7701
This indicator appears when the steering This warning indicator appears when the This indicator illuminates when the Re-
responsive fog lights system malfunctions. BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case verse Automatic Braking System is turned
When this indicator appears while the the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic
system is activated, contact your SUBARU shown on the combination meter display Braking System is suspended temporarily.
dealer for an inspection. (color LCD). When this indicator appears, Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF have your vehicle inspected by your System” F7-61.
indicator SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
S03AE7702
This indicator appears when the steering & Icy road surface warn-
responsive fog lights system is deacti- & BSD/RCTA OFF indica- ing indicator (if
vated. This indicator disappears when the tor (if equipped) S03AE86 equipped) S03AE82
system is activated.
The indicator appears when the BSD/ When the outside temperature is 378F
RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate (38C) or less, the icy road surface warning
& X-mode indicator (if the BSD/RCTA. In this case the BSD/ will illuminate to inform the driver that the
equipped) S03AE68 RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on the road surface may be frozen.
This indicator appears while the X-mode is combination meter display (color LCD).
activated. It will disappear when the X- For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA” F7-52. NOTE
mode is deactivated. Refer to “To activate/ . The outside temperature indicator
deactivate the X-mode” F7-39. & RAB warning shows the temperature in the area
indicator (if equipped) S03AE91 around the sensor. Therefore, the tem-
& Hill descent control in- This indicator illuminates if the Reverse
perature indication may differ from the
dicator (if equipped) actual outside air temperature.
S03AE69 Automatic Braking System malfunctions. . The icy road surface warning screen
This indicator appears while the hill des- Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking should be treated only as a guide. Be
cent control function is in standby. It will System” F7-61. sure to check the condition of the road
flash while the hill descent control function surface before driving.
is operating. It will disappear when the hill . Once the icy road surface warning
descent control function is not available. screen appears, it will not disappear
Refer to “Hill descent control function” F7- unless the outside temperature has
40. increased to 418F (58C) or higher.
& Basic operation original screen after a few seconds. While NOTE
S03BN01 the “ ” information reminder is shown on . Once the welcome screen appears, it
the display, it may be possible to display takes a certain period of time to display
the warning screen again. To recall the it again.
message marked with “ ” on the display, . If the ignition switch is operated
pull the “ /SET” switch on the steering after unlocking the driver’s door, the
wheel toward you. welcome screen will not appear even
when the driver’s door is opened and
NOTE closed.
When the multi-function display (color . The welcome screen will disappear
LCD) is set to the setting screen, the when you lock the driver’s door by
combination meter display (color LCD) using the remote keyless entry system
cannot be controlled pressing on the (all models) or the keyless access
“ ”, “ ” and “ /SET” on the control function (if equipped) while the wel-
Control switch switch. come screen is displayed.
1) (Up) . The welcome screen including the
2) /SET (enter) & Welcome screen and Good- multi-function display (color LCD) (if
3) (Down) bye screen equipped) and the audio/navigation
S03BN08 unit can be set to on or off. For details,
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control When the driver’s door is opened and refer to “Welcome Screen” F3-41.
switch, the screens and selection items closed after unlocking the door, the wel-
can be switched. When the “ /SET” come screen will appear on the combina-
switch is pulled toward you, the item can tion meter display (color LCD) for approxi-
be selected and set. mately 20 seconds.
If there are some useful messages, such When the ignition switch is turned to the
as vehicle information, warning informa- “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current meter display (color LCD) gradually turns
screen, and appear on the display accom- off (Good-bye screen).
panied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the
– CONTINUED –
Mark Name Page & Basic screens Current fuel consumption screen:
S03BN06
Steering responsive fog By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
lights OFF indicator (if 3-31 steering wheel, you can change the screen
equipped)
that is always displayed.
High beam assist warn- Average fuel consumption screen:
ing indicator (yellow) (if 3-30
equipped)
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
time a complete hour has elapsed. If the speed corresponding to the A trip meter & Outside temperature indica-
display is giving a reading other than the display and the average vehicle speed tor
journey time, the display switches to the corresponding to the B trip meter display. S03BO01
journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and When either of the trip meter displays is
returns to its original reading each time a reset, the corresponding average vehicle
complete hour has elapsed. speed value is also reset.
NOTE NOTE
The journey time is reset when the When either trip meter display is reset,
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” the average vehicle speed correspond-
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position. ing to that trip meter display is not
shown until the vehicle has subse-
! Average vehicle speed quently covered a distance of 1 mile
S03BO0905
(or 1 km).
! Turn off display of driving informa-
tion display 1) U.S.-spec. models
S03BO0906 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
Select the blank space in the menu to exit
the driving information display selection.
NOTE
NOTE . The outside temperature indicator
. The average fuel consumption and shows the temperature around the
average vehicle speed are calculated sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-
even while the driving information dis- dication may differ from the actual
play is not displayed. outside air temperature.
. Even if you turn off the driving . The temperature unit cannot be
1) When units in miles is selected information display, the display will changed.
2) When units in km is selected automatically turn on when the battery
This display shows the average vehicle voltage is disconnected and then re-
speed since the trip meter was last reset. connected for battery replacement or
Pressing the TRIP RESET switch toggles fuse replacement.
the display between the average vehicle
! Road surface freeze warning indi- condition of the road surface before Multi-function display (color
cation driving.
S03BO0101
LCD) (if equipped)
S03BP
& X-mode indicator (if NOTE
equipped) S03BO12
3
For models with multi-function display
This indicator will be shown while the X- (black and white), refer to “Multi-func-
mode is activated. It will turn off when the tion display (black and white)” F3-42.
X-mode is deactivated.
WARNING
& Clock
S03BO10
For details about clock setting, refer to Always pay adequate attention to
“Clock” F3-62. safe driving when operating the
multi-function display (color LCD)
while the vehicle is in motion. When
1) U.S.-spec. models operation of the multi-function dis-
2) Except U.S.-spec. models play (color LCD) is disturbing your
awareness and ability to concen-
When the outside temperature drops to a trate on driving, stop the vehicle in
certain temperature or lower, the tempera- a safe place before performing op-
ture indication flashes for 5 seconds to erations on the screen. Also, do not
show that the road surface may be frozen. concentrate on the display while
If the display is already indicating that the driving. Doing so may cause you to
outside temperature is low when the look away from the road and could
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” result in an accident.
position, the indication does not flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
! Information screen
S03BP1019
Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.
– CONTINUED –
*1: If equipped
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
– CONTINUED –
! Audio screen
S03BP101907
1) Driving range on remaining fuel The time and date are displayed.
2) Average fuel consumption corresponding You can adjust the time and date. For
The screen of the currently selected audio to the driving distance of each trip meter
details, refer to “Clock” F3-62.
source is displayed. 3) Current fuel consumption
For details about how to use the audio set, The fuel consumption information is dis-
refer to the separate navigation/audio played on the screen.
Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
You can store a maximum of 5 birth-
days.
! Anniversary setting
S03BP280103 2. Select “Yes” to turn off the screen.
1. The procedure for setting an anniver- Select “No” to return to the previous
sary is the same as “Birthday setting” F3- screen.
59, except that in step 1 “Anniversary” is
selected. Restoring the screen
When the INFO button is operated after
2. Select from the list the number that you the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” or
– CONTINUED –
“ACC” position, the screen will be restored. Back” to return to the previous screen 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
The screen will be restored with the basic without applying the setting changes. Back” to return to the previous screen
screen that was displayed when the without applying the setting changes.
screen was turned off. NOTE
. You can display a maximum of the 3 NOTE
NOTE items.
While the screen is off, the screen . The same item cannot be selected Traffic information setting is only dis-
switches to the climate control screen for the left, center or right location. played for the audio unit with SiriusXM
only when the climate control system is . Weather information for 3 hours satellite radio.
operated. later or 6 hours later can be displayed. ! Beep setting
S03BP280504
! Favorite setting 1. Select “Beep” from the 2nd menu in the
S03BP280502 ! Bypass screen setting setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
1. Select the “Favorite” from the 2nd S03BP280503
menu in setting screen. Refer to “Setting 1. Select “Bypass Screen” from the 2nd F3-57.
screen” F3-57. menu in the setting screen. Refer to
“Setting screen” F3-57.
without applying the setting changes. 1. Select “Clear All Settings” from the 2nd
! Maintenance schedule setting menu on the setting screen. Refer to
S03BP280304
The setting procedure is the same as “Setting screen” F3-57.
“Engine oil setting” F3-61, but select the
“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 1.
– CONTINUED –
Clock
S03AF
2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the 2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the
control switches. control switches.
! Initialize
S03BP2804
& How to get the source code
You can initialize the items that have been using the open source
set to your preference. S03BP29
Free/Open Source Software Information
1. Select “Initialize” from the 2nd menu on
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting This product contains Free/Open Source
screen” F3-57. Software (FOSS).
The license information and/or the source
code of such FOSS can be found at the
following URL.
http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open-
source/ivi/subaru/
& Preparation for clock adjust- & Setting the clock automati- connecting smartphones.
ment setting cally
S03AF01 S03AF02 & Setting the clock manually
Before setting the clock, the setting mode To set the clock automatically, the “Auto” S03AF03
(“Auto” or “Manual”) will need to be mode must be selected in the clock To set the clock in manual mode, “Manual”
selected. adjustment setting preparation procedure. must be selected in the clock adjustment
setting preparation procedure. 3
To select the mode, perform the following ! Models with navigation system
procedure. S03AF0201 ! Type A multi-function display (black
The clock will be set automatically where a and white)
GPS signal is available. S03AF0301
! Setting 12-hour or 24-hour dis- ! Type B multi-function display (color & Regulatory information
play LCD) S03AF04
S03AF030102 S03AF0302
The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour
display. Perform the following procedure to
switch the display format. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
1. Place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/ registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
“OFF” position. SIG, Inc.
2. Press and hold the “−” button located
near the clock display for approximately 5
seconds. The clock display will then start
to flash.
3. While the clock display is flashing,
press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds. The clock format will
then change.
4. The clock display will continue to flash ! Adjusting the clock
for approximately 3 seconds to inform that
S03AF030201
1. Select “Time/Date” from the 2nd menu
the clock display has been changed. of the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” F3-57.
2. Use the control switch to set the date,
time and 12-hour or 24-hour format.
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
Back” to return to the previous screen
without changing the settings.
NOTE
The Birthday/Anniversary and mainte-
nance reminder system function based
on the time and date on the multi-
function display (color LCD).
Light control switch & Headlights ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
S03AH
S03AH01 and license plate lights are automatically
& Precautions and tips on or off depending on the level of the
S03AH06 ambient light.
CAUTION NOTE 3
. Use of any lights for a long period The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
of time while the engine is not lights can be changed by a SUBARU
running can cause the battery to dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer
discharge. for details. Also, for models with a
combination meter display (color
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
LCD), the setting can be changed using
sure that the lights are turned off.
the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle
If the vehicle is left unattended
Setting” F3-41.
for a long time with the lights
illuminated, the battery may be To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on . Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights
discharged. the end of the turn signal lever. While the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-
“ ” position: matically turn on when the windshield
NOTE Instrument panel illumination, headlights, wipers operate several times. The head-
. Even if the key is removed from the parking lights, front side marker lights, rear lights will automatically turn off when the
ignition switch, the lights can be illumi- side marker lights, tail lights and license wipers stop.
nated by operating the light control plate lights are on.
switch from the “ ” (off) position to the “ ” position: NOTE
“ ” or “ ” position. Instrument panel illumination, parking The ON/OFF setting of this function can
. If the driver’s door is opened while lights, front side marker lights, rear side be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
the lights are illuminated and the key is marker lights, tail lights and license plate Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
removed from the ignition switch, the lights are on. tails.
chirp sound will inform the driver that “ ” position (if equipped):
the lights are illuminated. “ ” position:
. Auto on/off headlights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” The headlights are all off.
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
– CONTINUED –
& High/low beam change & Headlight flasher & High beam assist function (if
(dimmer) S03AH03
equipped)
S03AH02 S03AH07
NOTE
. The high beam assist function uti-
lizes the stereo camera installed at the 3
position of the front map lights.
. For details on how to handle the
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
The high beam assist function automati-
cally changes the headlight from high
beam to low beam (or vice versa).
When all of the following conditions are
1) High beam CAUTION met, the headlight will change to high
2) Low beam beam.
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
When the headlights are on high beam, the position for more than just a few . When the vehicle speed increases to or
high beam indicator light “ ” on the seconds. above 20 mph (32 km/h).
combination meter is also on. . There is no preceding or oncoming
To flash the headlights, pull the lever vehicle.
toward you and then release it. The high . The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
beam will stay on for as long as you hold . The road does not have a sharp curve.
the lever.
When any of the following conditions is
When the headlights are on high beam, the met, the headlight will change to low beam.
high beam indicator light “ ” on the
combination meter also illuminates. . When the vehicle speed decreases to
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
. When there is a preceding or oncoming
– CONTINUED –
the next time the ignition switch is and license plate lights will be on. are dirty.
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position – If there are lights similar to the
and the engine is restarted. ! Tips for the high beam assist sys- headlights or the tail lights in the
tem surrounding area.
! How to change the headlight mode . The high beam assist function recog-
S03AH0703
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
manually nizes the conditions surrounding the ve- 3
S03AH0702 hicle ahead is driven without its head-
Change to the low beam: hicle based on the brightness of illumina- lights and tail lights on.
When you return the turn signal lever to the tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, – If the headlights of an oncoming
center position, the high beam assist the headlight mode may switch in some vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
function will turn off and the high beam situations that do not match to the driver’s ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the
assist indicator light (green) will turn off. sense. light beams are not aimed correctly.
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be – When a rapid change of brightness
Change to the high beam: detected. continues while driving.
When you turn the light control switch to . Under the following situations, the
the “ ” position, the headlight mode will – When driving on a road with many
brightness of ambient illumination may ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
be changed to the high beam. not be detected correctly and the high – When driving on a road with many
At this time, the high beam assist function beam assist function may not work prop- curves.
will turn off, the high beam assist indicator erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam
(green) will turn off and the high beam – When there are some objects that
may disturb the oncoming vehicle or reflect light strongly, such as a road
indicator light will turn on. vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
may continue although there are no
NOTE oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.
– When the rear part of the vehicle
. After manually changing the head- ahead, such as a container, reflects
In the such cases, change the headlight light strongly.
light mode to the high beam, if you turn mode manually.
on the high beam assist function, – When the headlights of your vehicle
– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand are damaged or dirty.
return the light control switch to the storm, heavy rain, etc.).
“AUTO” position. – When your vehicle is tilted, such as
– When the windshield glass is dirty or in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is
. When manually changing the head-
fogged. being towed.
light mode to the high beam, if you turn
the light control switch to the “ ” – When the windshield is cracked or – Immediately after the engine has
position, the instrument panel illumina- damaged. started.
tion, parking lights, front side marker – When the stereo camera is de- . In the following conditions, the head-
lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights formed or the stereo camera lenses light mode will not be automatically chan-
– CONTINUED –
ged from the high beam to the low beam. – When the headlights of an oncom- . For CVT models, the select lever is in a
– When your vehicle passes an on- ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle position other than the “P” position.
coming vehicle suddenly in a blind ahead illuminate on only one side.
curve. – When the oncoming vehicle or NOTE
– When another vehicle passes in vehicle ahead is a motorcycle. When the light switch is in the “ ”
front of your vehicle. – Conditions of a road (slope, curve, position, the instrument panel illumina-
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve- road surface, etc.). tion, front side marker lights, tail lights
hicle ahead comes in and out of view – Number of passengers and weight and license plate lights are also illumi-
because of continuous curves, median of loaded cargo. nated.
strips, roadside trees, etc. – Limitation of the detection ability of
. If the stereo camera detects the light of the stereo camera.
the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,
the headlight mode may change from the
& Daytime running light system
S03AH04
high beam to the low beam automatically.
. The headlight mode may change from WARNING
the high beam to the low beam, or the low When the daytime running lights are
beam mode may continue, when affected illuminated, the tail lights do not
by a street light, traffic signal, illumination illuminate. When it becomes dark
of an advertisement board, or a reflective outside, turn the light switch to the
object such as a road sign and signboard. “ ” position to illuminate the head-
. The timing of the change of headlight lights and tail lights. This will im-
mode may differ due to the following prove visibility and allow other dri-
factors. vers to see your vehicle more easily.
– Color or brightness of the headlights
of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights The daytime running lights will automati-
of a vehicle ahead. cally illuminate when the following condi-
– The headlights of the oncoming tions are fulfilled.
vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle . The engine is running.
ahead are covered with mud, snow, . The parking brake is fully released.
etc. . The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
– Movement and direction of an on- (if equipped), “ ” or off position.
coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.
3-72 Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)
S03AT
. The light control switch is in the “ ” ! Steering responsive fog lights OFF ! Steering responsive fog lights OFF
position, or the light control switch is in the switch indicator
“AUTO” position and the low beam head- S03BA0301 S03BA0302
Turn signal lever & One-touch lane changer Wiper and washer
S03AI01
S03AI To flash the turn signal and turn signal S03AM
. In freezing weather, be sure that Refer to “Windshield washer and streaking on the glass. If you
the blade rubbers are not frozen fluid” F11-28. cannot remove those streaks after
to the windshield or rear window . Do not clean the blade rubbers operating the washer or if the wiper
before switching on the wipers. with gasoline or a solvent, such operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
Attempting to operate the wiper as paint thinner or benzine. This face of the windshield or rear window
with the blades frozen to the will cause deterioration of the and the blade rubbers using a sponge 3
window glass could cause not blade rubbers. or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
only the blade rubbers to be mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
damaged but also might cause rinse the window glass and blade
the wiper motor to fail. If the blade NOTE rubbers with clean water. The glass is
rubbers are frozen to the window . The windshield wiper motor is pro- clean if no beads form on the glass
glass, be sure to operate the tected against overloads by a circuit when you rinse with water.
defroster, windshield wiper dei- breaker. If the motor operates continu- . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
cer (if equipped) or rear window ously under an unusually heavy load, even after following this procedure,
defogger before turning on the the circuit breaker may trip to stop the replace the blade rubbers with new
wiper. motor temporarily. If this happens, park ones. For replacement instructions,
. If the wipers stop during opera- your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
tion because of ice or some other wiper switch, and wait for approxi- F11-29.
obstruction on the window, this mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
might cause the wiper motor to will reset itself, and the wipers will
fail even if the wiper switch is again operate normally.
turned off. If this occurs, . Clean your blade rubbers and win-
promptly stop the vehicle in a dow glass periodically with a washer
safe place, turn the ignition solution to prevent streaking, and to
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po- remove accumulations of road salt or
sition and clean the window glass road film. Operate the windshield
to allow proper wiper operation. washer for at least 1 second so that
. Use clean water if windshield washer solution will be sprinkled all
washer fluid is unavailable. In over the windshield or rear window.
areas where water freezes in . Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
winter, use SUBARU Windshield rial on the windshield or the blade
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. rubbers results in jerky wiper operation
– CONTINUED –
& Windshield wiper and washer ! Wiper intermittent time control ! Windshield washer
switches S03AM0103 S03AM0104
S03AM01
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
! Operating the wiper lever
S03AM0106
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- control lever toward you. The washer fluid
ing interval of the wiper. The operating sprays until you release the lever. The
interval can be adjusted in several steps wipers operate while you pull the lever.
from the shortest interval to the longest.
: Mist operation (for a single wipe)
: Off
: Intermittent operation
: Low speed operation
: High speed operation
NOTE & Rear window wiper and position (MT models), the rear wiper will
washer switch switch to continuous operation. When you
S03AM02 move the select lever/shift lever from the
“R” (reverse) position to another position,
the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation. 3
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off
“ ” position, if the front windshield wiper is
operating continuously, the rear wiper will
operate intermittently when you move the
select lever/shift lever to the “R” (reverse)
position.
The factory setting (default setting) of the
Windshield washer fluid warning light
reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
The windshield washer fluid warning follows.
: Washer operation (accompanied by
. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
light illuminates when the washer fluid wiper operation)
level in the tank has dropped to the : Continuous operation . Other models: Operational
lower limit. If the warning light illumi-
: Intermittent operation This setting can be changed by a SUBARU
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the
refilling procedure, refer to “Wind- : Off dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
shield washer fluid” F11-28. Washer operation (accompanied by details.
: wiper operation)
CAUTION
! Rear wiper
S03AM0201 Do not attach anything that disturbs
With the switch turned to the “ ” position, the rear wiper operation on the rear
the rear wiper will operate intermittently at gate. Doing so may damage the rear
intervals corresponding to the vehicle wiper when it operates.
speed. In this position, when you move
the select lever to the “R” position (CVT
models) or the shift lever to the reverse
– CONTINUED –
1) Display
2) Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
1) Normal position matically dims to eliminate the glare and
2) Anti-glare position preserve your vision.
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.
To reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the
antiglare position.
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea- 3. To adjust for compass zone variance: & Auto-dimming mirror/com-
ture (1) Find your current location and pass with HomeLink® (if
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
S03AP0205
zone number on the map. equipped)
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming (2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for S03AP07
feature is enabled when the switch’s green more than 6 seconds or until a zone
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming number appears in the display. 3
feature will default to on with each ignition (3) Once the zone number appears in
cycle. the display, toggle the “ ” switch
again until your current location zone
! To Operate the Compass Feature
S03AP0206 number appears. After you stop press-
1. To turn the compass feature on/off, ing the switch, your new zone number
press and hold the “ ” switch for more will be saved. Within a few seconds,
than 3 seconds or until the display turns the display will show a compass direc-
on/off. The compass feature will default to tion.
on with each ignition cycle. 4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,
vehicle in circles until compass is cali- recalibrate the compass. Press and hold 1) Display
brated. the “ ” switch for more than 9 seconds or 2) HomeLink Buttons
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a 3) Switch
“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali- During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
brated. feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
matically dims to eliminate the glare and
preserve your vision.
– CONTINUED –
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea- until a “C” appears in the display. Once a
ture “C” appears in the display, slowly drive the
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
S03AP0705
vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming brated.
feature is enabled when the switch’s green
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming ! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
feature will default to on with each ignition tem
S03AP0704
cycle. The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up to
! To Operate the Compass Feature
S03AP0706 three hand-held radio-frequency remotes
1. To turn the compass feature on/off, used to activate devices such as gate
press and hold the “ ” switch for more operators, garage door openers, entry
than 3 seconds or until the display turns door locks, security systems, even home
on/off. The compass feature will default to Compass calibration zones lighting. The below steps are generic
on with each ignition cycle. 3. To adjust for compass zone variance: programming instructions; for Genie and
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the (1) Find your current location and Sommer garage door openers please go
vehicle in circles until compass is cali- zone number on the map. directly to the HomeLink website. Addi-
brated. (2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for tional information and programming vi-
more than 6 seconds or until a zone deos can be found at
number appears in the display. www.HomeLink.com and
(3) Once the zone number appears in www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
the display, toggle the “ ” switch
again until your current location zone CAUTION
number appears. After you stop press- . Before programming HomeLink
ing the switch, your new zone number to a garage door opener or gate
will be saved. Within a few seconds, operator, make sure that people
the display will show a compass direc- and objects are out of the way of
tion. the device to prevent potential
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan- harm or damage.
ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,
. When programming a garage
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold
door opener, it is advised to park
the “ ” switch for more than 9 seconds or
– CONTINUED –
the device during the “cycling” process ! Reprogramming a Single Range may be reduced by obstacles such
to prevent possible overheating. HomeLink Button as houses or trees. You may have to slow
S03AP070406 your vehicle speed to successfully receive
To program a previously trained button,
Proceed with “Programming a New the garage door opener communication.
follow these steps:
HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink ! Programming Two-Way Commu-
! Using HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button. nication
S03AP070411 S03AP070414
To operate, simply press and release the 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
programmed HomeLink button. Activation flash orange after 20 seconds. The
will now occur for the trained device (i.e. HomeLink button can be released at this
garage door opener, gate operator, secur- point. Proceed with “Programming a New
ity system, entry door lock, home/office HomeLink Button” - step 3.
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand- 3. If you do not complete the program-
held remote of the device may also be ming of a new device to the button, it will
used at any time. revert to the previously stored program-
ming.
! Erasing HomeLink Buttons
S03AP070412
To erase programming from the three ! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
buttons (individual buttons cannot be nication
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as S03AP070413
outlined below), follow the step noted: HomeLink has the capability of commu-
1) Status Indicators
nicating with your garage door opener.
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink HomeLink can receive and display “clos- Within five seconds after programming a
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED ing” or “opening” status messages from new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s
indicator will change from continuously lit compatible garage door opener systems. garage door status indicators will flash
to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. At any time, HomeLink can also recall and rapidly green indicating that the garage
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. display the last recorded status commu- door two-way communication has been
HomeLink is now ready to be programmed nicated by the garage door opener to enabled. If your garage door status in-
at any time beginning with “Programming a indicate your garage door being “closed” dicators flashed, two-way communication
New HomeLink Button” - step 1. or “opened”. programming is complete.
HomeLink has the capability of receiving If the garage door status indicators do not
this communication from the garage door flash, additional HomeLink information
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m). and programming videos can be found
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking This device complies with part 15 of the
Orange) FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid following two conditions: (1) This de-
Green)
3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
1) Status Indicators ence, and (2) this device must accept
ing Orange)
Recall and display (at any time) the last 4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid any interference received, including
recorded garage door status message Green) interference that may cause undesired
communicated to HomeLink by simulta- operation.
If two-way communication programming is
neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and successful, HomeLink will display the
2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display status of your garage door opener with
the last recorded status for three seconds. arrow indicators.
! Certification
S03AP070416
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or
– CONTINUED –
! Remote control mirror switch Defogger and deicer (if The vehicle is equipped with the defogger
S03AP0302
and the deicer (if equipped) system. The
equipped) defogger and deicer system is activated
S03BI
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
3
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
. If the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is approximately above
1048F (408C) when the switch is turned
on, the system will not heat the steering
wheel. Then, the indicator light will
continue to illuminate.
. The Heated Steering Wheel system
will automatically turn off approxi-
Climate control
Ventilator control .................................................... 4-2 Air inlet selection ...................................................4-9
S04
Center ventilators .................................................. 4-2 To turn off the climate control system.....................4-9
Side ventilators...................................................... 4-2 Defrosting.............................................................. 4-10
Climate control panel ............................................. 4-2 Operating tips for heater and air conditioner .... 4-10
Type A ................................................................... 4-3 Cleaning ventilation grille ..................................... 4-10
Type B ................................................................... 4-4 Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight .... 4-10
Type C ................................................................... 4-5 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
Automatic climate control operation circuit................................................................ 4-11 4
(type B and C) ...................................................... 4-6 Checking air conditioning system before
summer season ................................................. 4-11
Sensors ................................................................. 4-6
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity
Manual climate control operation.......................... 4-7 and low temperature weather conditions ............ 4-11
Airflow mode selection........................................... 4-7 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when
MAX A/C mode (for type B and C) .......................... 4-8 engine is heavily loaded .................................... 4-11
Temperature control............................................... 4-8 Refrigerant for your climate control system .......... 4-11
Fan speed control .................................................. 4-9 Air filtration system...............................................4-11
Air conditioner control ........................................... 4-9 Replacing a cabin air filter .................................... 4-12
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
F3-50.
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
F3-50.
Automatic climate control operation, the “FULL” indicator light on & Sensors
the multi-function display (color LCD)
operation (type B and C)
S04AI03
The sensors are located as follows.
will turn off and the “AUTO” indicator
S04AI
light will remain illuminated. You can
When this mode is selected, the fan speed, then manually control the system as
airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air desired using the button you operated.
conditioner compressor operation are To change the system back to the FULL
automatically controlled. To activate this AUTO mode, press the AUTO button.
mode, perform the following.
1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator To turn off the climate control system,
light “FULL AUTO” on the multi-function press the ON/OFF button. Then the air
display (color LCD) illuminates. inlet selection will be set to the following.
2. Set the preferred temperature using . When the air inlet selection is set to
the temperature control dial. auto mode: Outside air circulation
. When the air inlet selection is set to
NOTE manual mode: No change
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
the air conditioner compressor will
automatically turn on if the temperature
is set much lower than the current
outlet air temperature. Even in this
case, the “A/C” indicator light on the
control panel illuminates.
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. If you operate any of the buttons on 1) Interior air temperature sensor
the control panel other than the ON/ 2) Solar sensor
OFF button, rear window defogger
button, SYNC button and temperature The automatic climate control system
control dial(s) during FULL AUTO mode employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated properly Manual climate control op-
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
eration
S04AJ
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the & Airflow mode selection
sensors, observe the following precau- S04AJ01
tions. Select the airflow mode by using the
. Do not subject the sensors to impact. airflow mode selection dial (type A and B)
or the airflow mode selection button (type
. Keep water away from the sensors. C). 4
. Do not cover the sensors.
Airflow modes are as follows.
– CONTINUED –
The temperature will be controlled indivi- & Air inlet selection & To turn off the climate control
dually using the driver’s and passenger’s S04AJ05
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet system
temperature control dials. selection button.
S04AJ07
To turn off the climate control system:
& Fan speed control . Recirculation: . Type A: select the “OFF” position using
S04AJ03 the fan speed control dial.
Select the preferred fan speed by turning When the indicator light on the air inlet
selection button illuminates, interior air is . Type B and C: press the ON/OFF
the fan speed control dial. button.
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the 4
& Air conditioner control air inlet selection button to the ON position
S04AJ04 for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
The air conditioner operates only when the when driving on a dusty road.
engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the . Outside air circulation:
fan is in operation to turn on the air When the indicator light on the air inlet
conditioner. When the air conditioner is selection button does not illuminate, out-
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates. side air is drawn into the passenger
To turn off the air conditioner, press the compartment. Press the air inlet selection
button again. button to the OFF position when the
interior has cooled to a comfortable tem-
NOTE perature and the road is no longer dusty.
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air WARNING
conditioner. If the ambient temperature
Continued operation in the ON posi-
decreases to approximately 328F (08C),
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
the air conditioner and dehumidifica-
to the OFF position as soon as the
tion system may not operate properly.
outside conditions are no longer
dusty.
Defrosting For type A climate control system, in Operating tips for heater and
this state:
S04AH air conditioner
– You cannot stop the air condi- S04AD
tioner compressor by pressing the & Cleaning ventilation grille
air conditioner button. S04AD01
allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning Air filtration system
heated interior. This results in quicker system. S04AE
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
windows closed during the operation of the & Air conditioner compressor equipped with an air filtration system.
air conditioner for maximum cooling effi- shut-off when engine is Replace the cabin air filter according to
ciency. heavily loaded
S04AD06
the replacement schedule found in the
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed schedule should be followed to maintain 4
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi- the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
S04AD03
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator extremely dusty conditions, the filter
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid should be replaced more frequently. Have
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep your filter checked or replaced by your
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade. SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use
only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
& Checking air conditioning & Refrigerant for your climate
system before summer sea- control system CAUTION
son S04AD07
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
S04AD04
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth- following occurs, even if it is not yet
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper od of adding, changing or checking the time to change the filter:
operation each spring. Have the air con- refrigerant is different from the method for . Reduction of the airflow through
ditioning system checked by your CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU the vents.
SUBARU dealer. dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
result of using the wrong refrigerant are not . Windshield gets easily fogged or
& Cooling and dehumidifying in covered under warranty. misted.
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions NOTE
S04AD05
Under certain weather conditions (high The filter can influence the air condi-
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
small amount of water vapor emission mance if not properly maintained.
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
– CONTINUED –
& Replacing a cabin air filter doing this, be careful not to damage
S04AE01 the hinge.
1. Remove the glove box.
NOTE
We recommend that you take measures
to protect the center console with
masking tape first, so that you avoid
scratching the center console with the
glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
one and then reinstall the cover. the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
(245,1)
Audio
Antenna ................................................................... 5-2 Audio set ................................................................. 5-3
S05
Roof antenna (for Rod type) ................................... 5-2
Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ........................... 5-2
5-2 Audio/Antenna
CAUTION
. Be sure to remove the antenna
rod before entering garages,
parking towers and other loca-
tions with low ceilings.
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod remains at-
1) Unscrew
tached, it may scratch the roof.
2) Remove
. When reinstalling the removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully The roof antenna is installed on the roof. The roof antenna is installed on the roof.
tighten it. The antenna rod can be removed by
unscrewing it from its base.
Audio set
S05AC
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
(249,1)
Interior equipment
Interior lights........................................................... 6-2 Accessory power outlets ....................................... 6-7
S06
Map lights.............................................................. 6-2 Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option) ..............6-8
Dome light ............................................................. 6-2 Ashtray (dealer option) .......................................... 6-9
Cargo area light ..................................................... 6-3 Floor mat ............................................................... 6-10
OFF delay timer ..................................................... 6-3 Coat hook.............................................................. 6-10
Sun visors ............................................................... 6-3 Shopping bag hook ...............................................6-11
Sun visor extension plate (if equipped) .................. 6-4 Cargo area cover (if equipped).............................6-11
Vanity mirror.......................................................... 6-4 Using the cover .................................................... 6-11
Vanity mirror with light (if equipped) ...................... 6-5 To remove the cover housing................................ 6-12
Storage compartment ............................................. 6-5 Stowage of the cargo area cover........................... 6-12
Glove box .............................................................. 6-5 To install the cover housing.................................. 6-13
Center console ...................................................... 6-6 Cargo tie-down hooks (if equipped) ................... 6-13 6
Cup holders ........................................................... 6-6
Bottle holders ........................................................ 6-6
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. & OFF delay timer Sun visors
Refer to “Remote keyless entry system” The following lights have an automatic
S06AA07
S06AC
F2-17. illumination function.
. The ignition switch is turned from the . dome light
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion. . map light
. cargo area light
& Cargo area light When the interior light switch is set to the
S06AA02
“DOOR” position, the light will automati-
cally turn on and turn off depending on the
locking and unlocking of the doors, the
opening and closing of the doors, as well 6
as the position of the ignition switch.
NOTE
The setting for the period of time in To block out glare, swing down the visors.
which the lights remain on (OFF delay To use the sun visor at a side window,
timer) can be changed by a SUBARU swing it down and move it sideways.
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details. For models with the combi-
nation meter display (color LCD), the
1) DOOR setting can also be changed by operat-
2) OFF ing the combination meter display
(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear cle Setting” F3-41.
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
nated for several seconds and gradually
turns off after the rear gate is closed.
OFF: The light remains off.
– CONTINUED –
S06AC01
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being temporarily blinded by the
glare of bright light.
CAUTION
With the sun visor positioned over the side Do not pull out the extension plate
window, you can use the sun visor exten- with the sun visor positioned over
sion plate to prevent glare through the gap the windshield. The extension plate
between the sun visor and center pillar. To would obstruct your view of the
use the extension plate, pull it toward the rearview mirror.
rear of the vehicle. When you have
finished using it, stow it by pushing it
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
toward the front of the vehicle.
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
& Vanity mirror with light (if Storage compartment & Glove box
equipped) S06AD
S06AD01
S06AC02
CAUTION CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed . Always keep the storage com-
while the car is being driven to avoid partment closed while driving to
being distracted by the light. reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous 6
items in the storage compart-
ment. 1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock.
2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-
lock.
To open the glove box, pull the handle.
To close it, push the lid firmly upward.
NOTE
. The emergency key is directional. If
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
the key cannot be inserted, change the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
direction that the grooved side is facing
The light beside the vanity mirror illumi- and insert it again.
nates when the mirror cover is opened. . For models with the “keyless access
NOTE with push-button start system”, use the
emergency key to lock or unlock the
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long glove box.
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
– CONTINUED –
6
The bottle holder equipped on each door Power outlet in the center console
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-
and other items. ance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W.
CAUTION
Power outlet below the climate control
dials . Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlets.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in
use.
– CONTINUED –
. Use only electrical appliances interfere with your shifting gears & Use with a cigarette lighter
which are designed for 12V DC. and operating the accelerator (dealer option)
The maximum power rating of an and brake pedals. If they do, do To use the accessory power outlet as a
S06AF01
appliance that can be connected not use the electrical appliance cigarette lighter socket, purchase the
is 120W. Do not use an appliance while driving. cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional
which exceeds the indicated wat- accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is
tage for each outlet. available from your SUBARU dealer.
. When using appliances con- The cigarette lighter operates only when
nected to two outlets simulta- the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
neously, the total power con- position.
sumed by them must not exceed To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
120W. Overloading the accessory knob and wait a few moments. It will
power outlet can cause a short automatically spring up when ready for
circuit. Do not use double adap- use.
ters or more than one electrical
appliance. WARNING
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too To avoid being burned, never grasp
tight for the accessory power the lighter by the end with the
NOTE heating element. Doing so could
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get When the lid of the center console is result in injury and could also da-
stuck. Only use plugs that fit closed, an opening remains between mage the heating element.
properly. the center console and the lid to allow
the power outlet in the center console
. Use of an electric appliance in the to be used. Pass the cord of the CAUTION
accessory power outlet for a long electrical appliance through this open-
period of time while the engine is ing. . Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
not running can cause battery because it will overheat.
discharge. . The electrical power socket is
. Before driving your vehicle, make originally designed to use a gen-
sure that the plug and the cord on uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
your electrical appliance will not plug. Do not use a non-genuine
Floor mat . Do not use more than one floor Coat hook
S06AJ mat. S06AH
– CONTINUED –
WARNING & To remove the cover housing & Stowage of the cargo area
1. Rewind the cover.
S06AK02
cover
Do not place anything on the ex- The cargo area cover can be stowed in
S06AK04
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and re-
winding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause 2. Push the cover housing to the right
leakage of gas from the stays, which side and shorten it.
may result in their inability to hold 3. Take it off the retainer. 1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo
the rear gate open. floor board.
2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo & To install the cover housing Cargo tie-down hooks
area end.
(if equipped)
S06AK05
1. Shorten the cover housing.
S06AM
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that ex-
ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The
maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10
kg) per hook.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
(265,1)
Hill descent control function ................................. 7-40 BSD/RCTA (if equipped)....................................... 7-52
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) System features.................................................... 7-52
(U.S.-spec. models)............................................ 7-41 System operation ................................................. 7-55
Parking your vehicle............................................. 7-43 BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning
Parking brake ....................................................... 7-43 buzzer ............................................................... 7-56
Parking tips .......................................................... 7-43 BSD/RCTA warning indicator ................................ 7-58
Hill start assist system......................................... 7-45 BSD/RCTA OFF switch.......................................... 7-59
To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist Certification for the BSD/RCTA ............................. 7-60
system................................................................ 7-46 Handling of radar sensors .................................... 7-60
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist Reverse Automatic Braking System
OFF indicator light .............................................. 7-47 (if equipped) ....................................................... 7-61
Cruise control (if equipped) ................................. 7-48 Reverse Automatic Braking System overview........ 7-62
To set cruise control ............................................. 7-48 Operating conditions ............................................ 7-62
To temporarily cancel the cruise control................ 7-49 Reverse Automatic Braking System operation....... 7-65
To turn off the cruise control................................. 7-50 Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking
To change the cruising speed ............................... 7-50 system operation............................................... 7-67
Cruise control indicator light................................. 7-52 Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF
Cruise control set indicator light ........................... 7-52 setting............................................................... 7-68
RAB warning indicator.......................................... 7-69
Handling of the sonar sensors .............................. 7-69
– CONTINUED –
agents to your fuel tank. octane rating no lower than that specified & Fuel filler lid and cap
in this manual. S07AA02
Many gasolines are now blended with ! Locations of the fuel filler lid and the
materials called oxygenates. Use of these . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. lid release lever
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. S07AA0202
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol Methanol can be used in your vehicle
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
vehicle, but should contain no more than mixture AND if it is accompanied by
10% ethanol for the proper operation of sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
your SUBARU. vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
Do not use any gasoline that contains use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
more than 10% ethanol, including from any under these conditions.
pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 (which . If undesirable driveability problems are
are only some examples of fuel containing experienced and you suspect they may be
more than 10% ethanol). fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
SUBARU dealer.
now producing reformulated gasolines, Fuel filler lid
which are designed to reduce vehicle . Fuel system damage or driveability
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of problems which result from the use of
reformulated gasoline. improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station op- CAUTION
erators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel
sions. may damage the paint, be sure to
wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
As additional guidance, only use fuels Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
suited for your vehicle as explained in the is not covered under the SUBARU
following description. Limited Warranty.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an Fuel filler lid release lever
fully inserted, its automatic stop- 7. Close the fuel filler lid completely. not securely tightened, fuel may
ping mechanism may not func- leak out while the vehicle is being
tion, causing fuel to overflow the CAUTION driven or fuel spillage could oc-
tank and creating a fire hazard. cur in the event of an accident,
If you spill any fuel on the painted creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto- surface, rinse it off immediately.
matic stop mechanism on the Otherwise, the painted surface . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
fuel nozzle activates. If you con- could be damaged. surfaces of the vehicle. Because
tinue to add fuel, temperature fuel may damage the paint, be
changes or other conditions sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
may cause fuel to overflow from quickly. Paint damage caused by
the tank and create a fire hazard. NOTE spilled fuel is not covered under
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler . Always use a genuine SUBARU
pump automatically stops. Do not add any door (lid) is located on the right side of fuel filler cap. If you use the
more fuel. the vehicle. wrong cap, it may not fit or have
6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened proper venting and your fuel tank
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain until it clicks or if the tether is caught and emission control system
not to catch the tether under the cap while under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE may be damaged. It could also
tightening. warning light/malfunction indicator lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- . Immediately put fuel in the tank
CAUTION whenever the low fuel warning
dicator light” F3-15.
Make sure that the cap is tightened light illuminates. Engine misfires
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage as a result of an empty tank could
CAUTION cause damage to the engine.
in the event of an accident.
. Never add any cleaning agents to Continuing to operate your vehi-
the fuel tank. The addition of a cle at an extremely low fuel level
cleaning agent may cause da- may result in a reduction of
mage to the fuel system. engine performance.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
State emission testing its contractors or licensees. served, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
(U.S. only) California and a number of federal states monitors are all complete.
S07AB
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to . A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
WARNING inspect your vehicle’s emission control the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
system. If your vehicle does not pass this properly operating (light is illuminated or is
Only use a four-wheel dynamometer test, some states may deny renewal of not working due to faulty LED [Light
when testing an All-Wheel Drive your vehicle’s registration. Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more
(AWD) model. diagnostic trouble codes stored in the
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
vehicle’s computer.
Testing of an AWD model must that monitors the performance of the
NEVER be performed on a single engine’s emission control system. Certi- . A state emission inspection may reject
two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt- fied emission inspectors will inspect the (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
ing to do so will result in uncon- On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
trolled vehicle movement and may part of the state emission inspection READY” is greater than one. If the
cause an accident or injuries to process. The OBDII system is designed vehicle’s battery has been recently re- 7
persons nearby. to detect engine and transmission pro- placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
blems that might cause the vehicle emis- inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII not ready for the emission test. Under this
CAUTION inspections apply to all 1996 model year condition, the vehicle driver should be
and newer passenger cars and trucks. instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a
. At state inspection time, remem- Over 30 states plus the District of Colum- few days to reset the readiness monitors
ber to tell your inspection or bia have implemented emission inspection and return for an emission re-inspection.
service station in advance not to of the OBDII system. . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
. The inspection of the OBDII system
on a two-wheel dynamometer. service.
consists of a visual operational check of
Otherwise, serious transmission
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal- Some states still use dynamometers in
damage will result.
function indicator light (MIL) and an ex- their emission inspection program. A
. Resultant vehicle damage due to amination of the OBDII system with an
improper testing is not covered dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
electronic scan tool. testing device that allows your vehicle’s
under the SUBARU Limited War- . A vehicle passes the OBDII system
ranty and is the responsibility of wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
inspection if proper operation of the one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
the state inspection program or “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) 7-9
Starting and stopping the en- & Starting engine . When starting the engine, be sure
gine (models without push-
S07BD01
to sit in the driver’s seat (except
! General precautions when starting when using the remote engine
button start system) engine start system).
S07BD0105
S07BD
WARNING
CAUTION NOTE
. Never start the engine from out- . Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-
Do not operate the starter motor side the vehicle (except when eration immediately after the engine
continuously for more than 10 sec- using the remote engine start has started.
onds. If the engine fails to start after system). It may result in an acci- . For a short time after the engine has
operating the starter for 5 to 10 dent. started, the engine speed is kept high.
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or . Do not leave the engine running When the warm-up is completed, the
more before trying again. in locations with poor ventilation, engine speed lowers automatically.
such as a garage and indoors. . On rare occasions, it may be difficult 7
NOTE The exhaust gas may enter the to start the engine depending on the
vehicle or indoors, and it may fuel and the usage condition (repeated
It may be difficult to start the engine
result in carbon monoxide poi- driving of a distance in which the
when the battery has been discon-
soning. engine has not warmed up sufficiently).
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
. Do not start the engine near dry In such a case, it is recommended that
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
foliage, paper, or other flammable you change to a different brand of fuel.
culty is caused by the electronically
substances. The exhaust pipe . On rare occasions, transient knock-
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
and exhaust emissions can cre- ing may be heard from the engine when
function. To overcome it, keep the
ate a fire hazard at high tempera- the accelerator is operated rapidly such
ignition switch in the “ON” position
tures. as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel-
for approximately 10 seconds before
eration. This is not a malfunction.
starting the engine.
. The engine starts more easily when
CAUTION the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
. If the engine is stopped during . Do not shift the select lever (CVT
driving, the catalyst may over- models) or shift lever (MT models)
heat and burn. while the starter is cranking.
– CONTINUED –
7-10 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)
! MT models the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/ position and check the operation of the
S07BD0101 “OFF” position and wait for at least 10 warning and indicator lights. Refer to
1. Apply the parking brake. seconds. Then fully depress the accel- “Warning and indicator” F3-12.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- erator pedal and turn the ignition 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
sories. switch to the “START” position. If the position without depressing the accelera-
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor engine starts, quickly release the ac- tor pedal. Release the key immediately
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold celerator pedal. after the engine has started.
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the engine. the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/ If the engine does not start, try the
The starter motor will only operate when “OFF” position. After waiting for 10 following procedure.
the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the seconds or longer, turn the ignition (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
floor. switch to the “START” position without “LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” depressing the accelerator pedal. least 10 seconds. After checking that
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still fails to start, the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ignition switch to the “START” position
“Warning and indicator” F3-12. for assistance. while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
full stroke). Release the accelerator
position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto-
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
engine warms up. the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/
If the engine does not start, try the “OFF” position and wait for at least 10
following procedure. seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the ! CVT models
S07BD0104 erator pedal and turn the ignition
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at 1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the “START” position. If the
least 10 seconds. After checking that 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- engine starts, quickly release the ac-
the parking brake is firmly set, turn the sories. celerator pedal.
ignition switch to the “START” position (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
while depressing the accelerator pedal the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/
position (preferably the “P” position).
slightly (approximately a quarter of the “OFF” position. After waiting for 10
full stroke). Release the accelerator The starter motor will only operate when
the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position. seconds or longer, turn the ignition
pedal as soon as the engine starts. switch to the “START” position without
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
depressing the accelerator pedal.
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 7-11
(4) If the engine still refuses to start, & Stopping the engine Starting and stopping engine
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
(models with push-button
S07BD02
The ignition switch should be turned off
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
only when the vehicle is stopped and the start system)
engine is idling. S07BE
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
& Safety precautions
WARNING S07BE06
matically lowers the idle speed as the Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-3.
engine warms up. Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause & Operating range for push-
While the engine is warming up, make sure loss of power to the power steering button start system
that the select lever is at the “P” or “N” and the brake booster, making steer- S07BE01
position and that the parking brake is Refer to “Operating range for push-button
ing and braking more difficult. It start system” F3-6.
applied. could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- & Starting engine
CAUTION tion on the ignition switch, causing 7
S07BE03
If you restart the engine while the the steering wheel to lock.
WARNING
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do not . There are some general precau-
attempt to place the select lever of a tions when starting the engine.
moving vehicle into the “P” position. Carefully read the precautions
described in “Starting engine”
F7-9.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
– CONTINUED –
7-12 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 7-13
! MT models however, for safety reasons, start in the “P” the engine.
S07BE0301
position.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the & Stopping engine
driver’s seat. 4. Depress the brake pedal until the S07BE04
operation indicator on the push-button 1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Apply the parking brake.
ignition switch turns green. When starting 2. Move the select lever to the “P”
3. Shift the shift lever to neutral. with the select lever in the “N” position, the position (CVT models).
4. Depress the brake pedal. indicator does not turn green.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
5. Depress the clutch pedal until the 5. While depressing the brake pedal, The engine will stop, and the power will be
indicator on the push-button ignition switch press the push-button ignition switch. switched off.
turns green.
6. While depressing the clutch pedal, NOTE
press the push-button ignition switch. WARNING
. While pressing the select lever but-
ton in, the indicator on the push-button . Do not touch the push-button
NOTE ignition switch will not turn green even ignition switch during driving. 7
In case the engine does not start by the when the select lever is in the “P” When the push-button ignition
normal engine start procedure, move position. switch is operated as follows,
the shift lever to the neutral position, . In case the engine does not start by the engine will stop.
and switch the power to “ACC”. De- the normal engine start procedure,
press the clutch pedal, and press the move the select lever to the “P” posi- – The switch is pressed and held
push-button ignition switch for at least tion, and switch the power to “ACC”. for 3 seconds or longer.
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only Depress the brake pedal, and press the – The switch is pressed briefly 3
use this engine start procedure in case push-button ignition switch for at least times or more in succession.
of emergency. 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only When the engine stops, the brake
use this engine start procedure in case booster will not function. A great-
! CVT models of emergency.
S07BE0304 er foot pressure will be required
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the . When the engine is not started, the on the brake pedal.
driver’s seat. brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
The power steering system will
2. Apply the parking brake. case, depress the brake pedal more
not operate either. A greater force
3. Shift the select lever into the “P” forcefully than usual. Check that the
will be required to steer, and it
position. The engine can also start when operation indicator on the push-button
may result in an accident.
the select lever is in the “N” position, ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start . If the engine stops during driving,
– CONTINUED –
do not operate the push-button & When access key fob does Remote engine start system
ignition switch or open any of the not operate properly (dealer option)
doors until the vehicle is stopped S07BE05
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key S07AZ
in a safe location. It is dangerous fob does not operate properly” F9-17.
because the steering lock may be WARNING
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact a . There are some general precau-
SUBARU dealer immediately. tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General precau-
CAUTION tions when starting engine” F7-
9.
For CVT models
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an
. Do not stop the engine while the enclosed environment (e.g.
select lever is in a position other closed garage). Prolonged opera-
than the “P” position. tion of a motor vehicle in an
. If the engine is stopped while the enclosed environment can cause
select lever is in a position other a harmful build-up of Carbon
than the “P” position, the power Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is harmful to your health. Exposure
left in this condition, the battery to high levels of Carbon Monox-
may be discharged. ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by The remote engine start system allows you
operating the push-button ignition to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
switch, do not stop the engine during In addition, the remote engine start system
driving except in an emergency. can activate the heater or air conditioner,
providing you with a comfortable cabin
upon entry. For more details, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-
mote engine start system. ! Starting the engine . The side marker lights, tail lights, and
S07AZ2101
parking lights flash once.
NOTE NOTE
. The length of time for which it is All vehicle doors (including rear gate) While the engine is idling via the remote
acceptable to allow the engine to and the engine hood must be closed engine start system, the following phe-
remain idling may be bound by local prior to activating the remote engine nomena will occur.
laws and regulations. Check the local start system. Any open entry point will . The side marker lights, tail lights, and
rules when using the remote engine prevent starting or cause the engine to parking lights remain illuminated.
start system. stop. . The fob button flashes once every 3
. When taking your vehicle in for seconds.
service, it is recommended that you The remote engine start system is acti-
. The power windows are disabled.
inform the service personnel that your vated by pressing the fob button on your
vehicle is equipped with a remote remote engine starter transceiver (fob) If the engine turns over but does not start
engine start system. twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within (or starts and stalls) the remote engine
operating range of the system and the start start system will power off and then 7
request is received, the following phenom- attempt to start the engine 3 additional
& Remote engine starter trans- ena will occur. times. The system will not attempt to
ceiver (fob) . The fob flashes and beeps once. restart the engine if it determines a vehicle
S07AZ21
. The horn sounds once. malfunction is preventing starting. If the
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and engine does not start after 3 additional
parking lights flash once. attempts, the remote engine start request
will be aborted.
If the fob is not within range (the user is too ! Stopping the engine
far away from the vehicle), the fob will S07AZ2102
indicate two long flashes without beeping. Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will
The system will check certain safety flash and beep three times, indicating the
preconditions before starting, and if all engine has stopped. If the stop request is
conditions are met, the engine will start not received (for example, if the user is too
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts, far away from the vehicle), the fob will
the following phenomena will occur. continue to flash once every 3 seconds.
1) Fob button . The fob flashes and beeps twice. The system will automatically stop the
. The horn sounds once. engine after 15 minutes.
– CONTINUED –
Fob Indication
Precondition Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button is — The fob is transmitting an RF signal
held down
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob 1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
button twice within 3 sec
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety
3 flashes 3 beeps reasons (see sections above) 7
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and 3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
holding fob button for at least 2 sec. 1 flash every 3 sec — Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
– CONTINUED –
start system, briefly press the lock button 1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
twice within 2 seconds, then press and keyless access function (if equipped) or
hold the lock button for 3 seconds. remote keyless entry system.
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked manu-
1. Press the lock button briefly. The ally using the key, the vehicle’s alarm
hazard warning flashers then flash once system will trigger (if the alarm system is
and the keyless buzzer chirps once. armed prior to activating the remote
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button engine start system) and the engine will
briefly again. The hazard warning flashers turn off. Perform either of the following
then flash once again, and the keyless procedures to disarm the alarm system.
buzzer chirps once again. Refer to “Alarm system” F2-24.
Access key fob 3. After step 2, immediately press and . Insert the key into the ignition switch
1) Lock button hold the lock button. The hazard warning and turn it to the “ON” position (models
An access key fob can be used as the flashers then flash three times, and the without “keyless access with push-
remote engine start transmitter. Operate horn will honk once. button start system”)
the lock button to start or stop the engine 4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3, . Turn the push-button ignition switch
as follows. release the lock button. The engine will to the “ACC” or “ON” position (models
then start successfully. with “keyless access with push-button
! Before starting the engine start system”)
S07AZ2201
Before using the remote engine start ! When stopping the engine . Press any button on the access key
system to start the engine, confirm the S07AZ2203
Press and hold the lock button to stop the fob/remote keyless entry transmitter.
following conditions. engine with remote engine start system. 2. Enter the vehicle.
. The select lever is in the “P” position 3. The engine will shut down when any
(CVT models). door or rear gate is opened.
. All doors including the rear gate are 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn to the “START” position to restart ing to the following procedure. or after 2 minutes.
the engine. 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain opened throughout the & System maintenance
& Entering the vehicle following entire process).
NOTE
S07AZ09
remote engine start shut- 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
For remote engine starter transceiver:
down 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
S07AZ10
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is “LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
opened by the remote keyless entry “OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle a
transmitter within a few seconds immedi- then back to “ON” again and leave the
minimum of one time using the key
ately following remote engine start shut- ignition “ON” throughout the programming
prior to activating the remote engine
down. process.
start system. This is required to allow
4. The system will flash the side marker the vehicle electronic systems to re-
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling lights, tail lights and parking lights and synchronize.
the interior of the vehicle honk the horn three times, indicating that
S07AZ04 the system has entered the transmitter ! Changing the battery
7
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- learn mode. S07AZ0901
perature controls to the desired setting and
operation. After the system starts the
5. Press and release the “ ” button on CAUTION
the transmitter that you want to program.
engine, the heater or air conditioning will . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
activate and heat or cool the interior to 6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and or in the remote engine start
your setting. transmitter when replacing the
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system has learned the transmitter. Upon battery.
& Remote transmitter program
successful programming, the remote start . Be careful not to damage the
(Remote engine starter confirmation transmitter button will flash printed circuit board in the re-
transceiver) one time. mote engine start transmitter
S07AZ13
New transmitters can be programmed to 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional when replacing the battery.
the remote engine start system in the transmitters (the system will accept up to . Be careful not to allow children to
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, eight transmitters). touch the battery and any re-
damaged or additional transmitters are 8. The system will exit the transmitter moved parts; children could
desired (the system will accept up to eight learn mode if the key is turned to the swallow them.
transmitters). New remote engine start “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed
transmitters can be programmed accord- . There is a danger of explosion if
– CONTINUED –
should be pointed away from the transmit- ! Canada-spec. models Manual transmission
ter circuit board on battery). S07AZ2302
S07AF
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
! U.S.-spec. models
S07AZ2301
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex- 7
pressly approved by the party re- The manual transmission is a fully syn-
sponsible for compliance could void chromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-
the user’s authority to operate the verse-speed transmission.
equipment. The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever
knob.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
– CONTINUED –
Continuously variable trans- in the “R” position. Doing so may shorten the warm-up time and improve
result in an unexpected accident driveability. The gearshift timing will
mission automatically shift to the normal timing
S07BG
or malfunction.
. Do not shift from the “D” position after the engine has warmed up.
WARNING into the “R” position or vice versa . Immediately after transmission fluid
until the vehicle has completely is replaced, you may feel that the
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” stopped. Such shifting may transmission operation is somewhat
position into the “D” or “R” position cause damage to the transmis- unusual. This results from invalidation
while depressing the accelerator sion. of data which the on-board computer
pedal. This may cause the vehicle has collected and stored in memory to
. When parking the vehicle, first allow the transmission to shift at the
to jump forward or backward. securely apply the parking brake most appropriate times for the current
and then place the select lever in condition of your vehicle. Optimized
the “P” position. Do not park for a shifting will be restored as the vehicle
CAUTION long time with the select lever in continues to be driven for a while.
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position any other position as doing so . When driving a CVT model under
only after the vehicle is comple- could result in a dead battery. continuous heavy load conditions such
tely stopped. Shifting while the as when towing a camper or climbing a
vehicle is moving may cause long, steep hill, the engine speed or the
damage to the transmission. & Continuously variable trans- vehicle speed may automatically be
mission features reduced. This is not a malfunction. This
. Do not race the engine for more S07BG06
than 5 seconds in any position The continuously variable transmission is phenomenon results from the engine
except the “N” or “P” position electronically controlled and provides an control function maintaining the cool-
when the brake is applied or infinite number of forward speeds and 1 ing performance of the vehicle. The
when chocks are used in the reverse speed. For some models, it also engine and vehicle speed will return to
wheels. This may cause the has a manual mode or an “L” position. a normal speed when the engine is able
transmission fluid to overheat. to maintain the optimum cooling per-
NOTE formance after the heavy load de-
. Never move the vehicle rearward . When the engine coolant tempera- creases. Driving under a heavy load
by inertia with the select lever set ture is still low, the transmission will must be performed with extreme care.
in a forward driving position or upshift or downshift at higher engine Do not try to pass a vehicle in front
move the vehicle forward by speeds than when the coolant tempera- when driving on an uphill slope while
inertia with the select lever set ture is sufficiently high in order to towing.
Type A Type B
1) Upshift indicator 1) Upshift indicator 7
2) Downshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator 3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
combination meter illuminate.
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
The gear position indicator shows the position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”
currently selected gear in the 1st-to-7th- indicated on it.
gear range. The upshift and downshift
To deselect the manual mode, return the
indicators show when a gear shift is
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
possible. When the upshift indicator “ ”
position.
illuminates, upshifting is possible. When
the downshift indicator “ ” illuminates, CAUTION
downshifting is possible. When both in-
dicators illuminate, upshifting and down- Do not place or hang anything on the
shifting are both possible. When the shift paddles. Doing so may result in
vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
– CONTINUED –
accidental gear shifting. & Selection of “L” (if equipped) illuminate on the combination meter.
S07BG03
To deselect “L”, move the select lever to
NOTE the “D” position.
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using & Shift lock function
S07BG04
the manual mode. The shift lock function helps prevent the
. If you attempt to shift down when the improper operation of the select lever.
engine speed is too high, i.e., when a . The select lever cannot be operated
downshift would push the tachometer unless the ignition switch is turned to the
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will “ON” position and the brake pedal is
be emitted to warn you that the down- depressed.
shift is not possible. . The select lever cannot be moved from
. If you attempt to shift up when the the “P” position to any other position before
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- “L” is for using engine braking when going the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the
sion will not respond. down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move brake pedal first, and then operate the
. You can perform a skip-shift (for the select lever from the “D” position to the select lever.
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating “L” position. . Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes- the ignition switch from the “ACC” position
sion. to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove
. The transmission automatically se- the key from the ignition switch.
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops . If the ignition switch is turned to the
moving. “LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select
. If the temperature of the transmis- lever is in the “N” position, the select lever
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT may not be moved to the “P” position after
OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi- a period of time. Therefore, move the
nation meter will illuminate. Immedi- select lever to the “P” position with the
ately stop the vehicle in a safe location brake pedal depressed soon after the
and let the engine idle until the warning ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
light turns off. “OFF” position.
performing the above procedure, the shift & Power steering warning light When the power steering warning
S07AJ10
light is illuminated, there may be
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
more resistance when the steering
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
soon as possible.
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
& Driving tips have the vehicle inspected immedi-
S07BG05
ately.
CAUTION
If the accelerator and brake pedals NOTE
are depressed at the same time, If the steering wheel is operated in the
driving torque may be restrained. following ways, the power steering
This is not a malfunction. control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
. Always apply the foot or parking brake system components, such as the con-
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or trol computer and drive motor, from
“R” position. & Power steering system fea- overheating.
. Always apply the parking brake when tures . The steering wheel is operated fre-
S07AJ11
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the The vehicle is equipped with an electric quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle with only the mechanical friction power steering system. When the ignition vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
of the transmission. switch is turned to the “ON” position, the speeds, such as while frequently turn-
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary power steering warning light on the com- ing the steering wheel during parallel
position on an uphill grade by using the “D” bination meter illuminates to inform the parking.
position. Use the brake instead. driver that the warning system is function- . The steering wheel remains in the
. The engine may, on rare occasions, ing properly. Then, if the engine started, fully turned position for a long period of
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- the warning light turns off to inform the time.
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. driver that the steering power assist is
operational. At this time, there will be more resis-
This phenomenon does not indicate a tance when steering. However this is
malfunction. not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and Braking a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
the power steering control system has S07AK
driving straight ahead while gradually
an opportunity to cool down. However, & Braking tips reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
if the power steering is operated in a S07AK01 road to a safe location.
non-standard way which causes power WARNING
assist limitation to occur too frequently, & Brake system
this may result in a malfunction of the Never rest your foot on the brake S07AK02
power steering control system. pedal while driving. This can cause ! Two separate circuits
S07AK0201
dangerous overheating of the Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake
brakes and needless wear on the systems. Each circuit works diagonally
brake pads and linings. across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
! When the brakes get wet the system still works. If one circuit fails,
S07AK0101 the brake pedal will go down much closer
When driving in rain or after washing the to the floor than usual and you will need to 7
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a press it down much harder. And a much
result, brake stopping distance will be longer distance will be needed to stop the
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle vehicle.
at a safe speed while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the brakes. ! Brake booster
S07AK0202
! Supplemental booster function Brake assist is a driver assistance system. & Disc brake pad wear warning
when vacuum pressure fails It assists the brake power when the driver indicators
S07AK0205
While the ignition switch is turned “ON” cannot depress the brake pedal strongly S07AK03
and the engine is running, the supple- and the brake power is insufficient.
mental booster function operates when the Brake assist generates the brake power
brake booster performance is decreased according to the speed at which the driver
due to insufficient vacuum boost. depresses the brake pedal.
When the brake pedal is depressed while NOTE
the supplemental booster function is oper-
When you depress the brake pedal
ating, an operation sound and brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
vibration may be generated. This is not a
phenomena occur. However, even
malfunction.
though these occur, they do not indi-
! Brake assist system cate any malfunctions, and the brake
S07AK0203
assist system is operating properly.
WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal is The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
applied by lighter force and generates a tors on the disc brakes give a warning
Do not be overconfident about the greater braking force.
brake assist. It is not a system that noise when the brake pads are worn.
. You might hear an ABS operating
brings more braking ability to the noise from the engine compartment. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
vehicle beyond its braking capabil- from the disc brakes while braking, im-
ity. Always use the utmost care mediately have your vehicle checked by
when driving regarding vehicle your SUBARU dealer.
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- following distance from other & ABS self-check
tem) vehicles. S07AL01
Just after the vehicle is started, you may
S07AL . When driving on badly surfaced feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or to when the ABS operates, and you may
which may occur during sudden braking or over deep newly fallen snow, also hear the sound of the ABS working
braking on slippery road surfaces. This stopping distances may be long- from the engine compartment. This is
helps prevent the loss of steering control er for a vehicle with the ABS than caused by an automatic functional test of
and directional stability caused by wheel one without. When driving under the ABS being carried out and does not
lock-up. these conditions, therefore, re- indicate a malfunction.
duce your speed and leave ample
When the ABS is operating, you may hear distance from other vehicles. & ABS warning light
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration . When tire chains are installed,
S07AL02
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-20.
in the brake pedal. This is normal when the stopping distances may be long-
ABS operates. er for a vehicle with the ABS than
one without. Be sure to reduce
7
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 your speed and maintain a safe
km/h). distance from the vehicle in front.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
WARNING you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
Always use the utmost care in driv- pump the brake pedal since
ing – overconfidence because you doing so may defeat the opera-
are driving a vehicle with the ABS tion of the ABS.
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
CAUTION
. The ABS does not always de-
crease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system If all the warning lights illuminate simulta-
malfunctions neously, take the following steps.
tribution (EBD) system
S07AM
S07AM01
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat
location.
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear 2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the
brakes to supply a greater proportion of the engine.
braking force. It functions by adjusting the 3. Restart the engine.
distribution of braking force to the rear 4. Release the parking brake.
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
If all the warning lights do not come
loading condition and speed.
back on:
The EBD system is an integral part of the
The EBD system have a possible malfunc-
ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
tion. Drive carefully to the nearest
nents to perform its function of optimizing
SUBARU dealer and have the system
the distribution of braking force. If any of
inspected.
the ABS components used by the EBD
system malfunction, the EBD system also If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, If all the warning lights stay illuminated
stops working. the system stops working and the following or come back on after approximately 2
warning lights illuminate simultaneously. seconds:
When the EBD system is operating, you . Brake system warning light
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight 1. Turn off the engine again.
. ABS warning light 2. Apply the parking brake.
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction. . Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light 3. Check the brake fluid level. For details
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if about checking the brake fluid level, refer
all the warning lights illuminate simulta- to “Checking the fluid level” F11-15.
neously during driving. . If the brake fluid level is not below the
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
conventional braking system will still func- malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
tion. However, the rear wheels will be more nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
prone to locking when the brakes are system inspected.
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s . If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”
motion may therefore become somewhat mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,
harder to control.
have the vehicle towed to the nearest Vehicle Dynamics Control namics Control is no guarantee
SUBARU dealer for repair. that full vehicle control will be
system
maintained at all times and under
WARNING S07AN
all conditions, its activation
& Safety precautions
S07AN05 should be seen as a sign that
. Driving with the brake system the speed of the vehicle should
warning light illuminated is dan- WARNING
be reduced considerably.
gerous. This indicates your brake
system may not be working prop- Always use the utmost care in driv- . Whenever suspension compo-
erly. If the light remains illumi- ing – overconfidence because you nents, steering components, or
nated, have the brakes inspected are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle an axle are removed from a
by a SUBARU dealer immedi- Dynamics Control system could ea- vehicle, have an inspection of
ately. sily lead to a serious accident. that system performed by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do . The following precautions should 7
CAUTION be observed in order to ensure
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest . Even if your vehicle is equipped that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
SUBARU dealer for repair. with Vehicle Dynamics Control trol system is operating properly:
system, winter tires should be – All four wheels should be
used when driving on snow-cov- fitted with tires of the same
ered or icy roads; in addition, size, type, and brand. Further-
vehicle speed should be reduced more, the amount of wear
considerably. Simply having a should be the same for all four
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tires.
tem does not guarantee that the – Keep the tire pressure at the
vehicle will be able to avoid proper level as shown on the
accidents in any situation. vehicle placard attached to
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- the driver’s side door pillar.
namics Control system is an – Use only the specified tempor-
indication that the road being ary spare tire to replace a flat
travelled on has a slippery sur- tire. With a temporary spare
face; since having Vehicle Dy- tire, the effectiveness of the
– CONTINUED –
& Vehicle Dynamics Control . a standing start on a steeply sloping hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics
system monitor road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or Control system is unavailable. Therefore
S07AN01 otherwise slippery surface you should not deactivate the Vehicle
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn- Dynamics Control system except under
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- . extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow above-mentioned situations.
tion indicator light” F3-23 and “Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3- NOTE
24. . When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
& Vehicle Dynamics Control Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
OFF switch Control system automatically reacti-
S07AN02
vates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 30 7
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the
When the switch is pressed during engine switch. To make the switch usable
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control again, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF indicator light “ ” on the combination “LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics engine.
Control system will be deactivated and the . When the switch is pressed to
Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF vehicle will behave like a model not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
Control system. Creating adequate driving trol system. When the switch is pressed formance is comparable with that of a
wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system may help to Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
recover from the loss of traction. Use the Control OFF indicator light turns off. activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system system except when absolutely neces-
necessary. deactivated, traction and stability en- sary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
– CONTINUED –
Control system is deactivated, compo- X-mode (if equipped) mode does not guarantee that the
nents of the brake control system may S07BI vehicle will be able to avoid
still activate. When the brake control accidents in any situation.
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy- WARNING . Activate the X-mode when you
namics Control operation indicator encounter a very slippery surface
light flashes. . Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be- at low speed. However, having X-
cause you are driving a vehicle mode is no guarantee that full
with X-mode could easily lead to vehicle control will be maintained
a serious accident. at all times and under all condi-
tions. When activating X-mode,
. Always use the utmost care in the speed of the vehicle should
driving – overconfidence be- be reduced considerably.
cause you are driving a vehicle
with hill descent control function . Whenever suspension compo-
could easily lead to a serious nents, steering components, or
accident. Be especially careful, an axle are removed from a
and depress the brake pedal if vehicle, have the system in-
necessary when driving on ex- spected by an authorized
tremely steep downhill, frozen, SUBARU dealer.
muddy or sandy roads. Failure . Observe the following precau-
to control the vehicle’s speed tions in order to ensure that the
may cause a loss of control and X-mode is operating properly:
result in a serious accident. – All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
CAUTION more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
tires.
with X-mode, winter tires should
be used when driving on snow- – Keep the tire pressure at the
covered or icy roads; in addition, proper level as shown on the
vehicle speed should be reduced label attached to the vehicle’s
considerably. Simply having X- door pillar.
– Use only the special tempor- X-mode has the following functions.
ary spare tire to replace a flat . Hill descent control function:
tire. With a normal temporary Using the hill descent control function, you
spare tire, the effectiveness of can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed
the X-mode is reduced and driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is
this should be taken into ac- likely to increase, the brake control system
count when driving the vehi- will be activated to adjust the vehicle
cle in such a condition. speed.
. If the hill descent control function . Driving ability control:
has operated continuously for a This mode increases the hill-climbing
long time, the temperature of the ability and driving ability as well as
brake disc may increase and the enabling smooth application of torque for
hill descent control function may easier control of the steering wheel. X-mode indicator (type A)
be temporarily disabled. In this
case, the hill descent control 7
indicator will disappear. When & To activate/deactivate the X-
the hill descent control indicator mode
disappears, the hill descent con- S07BI01
To activate:
X-mode switch Press the X-mode switch. While the X-
mode is activated, the X-mode indicator
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) 7-41
! Hill descent control indicator operating. It will disappear when the Tire pressure monitoring
S07BI0301
function is in the disabled mode. When
this function is changed from operational
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
to non-operational, it will disappear when models)
the vehicle speed reaches more than S07AO
7-42 Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)
never brake suddenly. Instead, to start the TPMS rechecking of lant is used, contact your nearest
perform the following procedure. the tire inflation pressures. If the SUBARU dealer or other qualified
Otherwise, an accident involving tire pressures are now above the service shop as soon as possi-
serious vehicle damage and ser- severe low pressure threshold, ble. Make sure to replace the tire
ious personal injury could occur. the low tire pressure warning pressure warning valve and
(1) Keep driving straight ahead light should turn off a few min- transmitter when replacing the
while gradually reducing utes later. tire. You may reuse the wheel if
speed. If this light still illuminates while there is no damage to it and if the
driving after adjusting the tire sealant residue is properly
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
safe location. pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
(3) Check the pressure for all four causes the tire to lose air rapidly. the tires, as this may cause a
tires and adjust the pressure If you have a flat tire, replace it malfunction of the tire pressure
to the COLD tire pressure with a spare tire as soon as sensors. If the light illuminates
shown on the tire placard. possible. steadily after blinking for ap-
The tire placard is located on proximately one minute,
the door pillar on the driver’s . When a spare tire is mounted or a promptly contact a SUBARU
side. wheel rim is replaced without the dealer to have the system in-
original pressure sensor/trans- spected.
Even when the vehicle is driven a mitter being transferred, the low
very short distance, the tires get tire pressure warning light will
warm and their pressures in- illuminate steadily after blinking
crease accordingly. Be sure to CAUTION
for approximately one minute.
let the tires cool thoroughly be- This indicates the TPMS is unable Do not place metal film or any metal
fore adjusting their pressures to to monitor all four road wheels. parts in the cargo area. This may
the standard values shown on the Contact your SUBARU dealer as cause poor reception of the signals
tire placard. Refer to “Tires and soon as possible for tire and from the tire pressure sensors, and
wheels” F11-21. The tire pres- sensor replacement and/or sys- the tire pressure monitoring system
sure monitoring system does not tem resetting. will not function properly.
function when the vehicle is sta-
tionary. After adjusting the tire . When a tire is repaired with liquid
pressures, increase the vehicle sealant, the tire pressure warning
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
– CONTINUED –
WARNING CAUTION
. Never leave unattended children . If your vehicle has a bumper
or pets in the vehicle. They could under guard (optional), pay atten-
accidentally injure themselves or tion to blocks and other obstruc-
others through inadvertent op- tions on the ground when park-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on ing. The underspoiler could be
hot or sunny days, the tempera- damaged by contact with them.
ture in a closed vehicle could . The braking power of the parking
quickly become high enough to brake may not be sufficient when
cause severe or possibly fatal stronger braking power is
injuries to people. needed (e.g., when parking on a
. Do not park the vehicle over steep slope while towing a trai-
When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry ler).
steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as
headed up the hill, the front wheels should they may burn easily if they come
be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
exhaust gas enters the passen-
ger compartment, occupants in
the vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
Hill start assist OFF indicator light is & To activate/deactivate the Hill
illuminated. Refer to “Hill start assist start assist system
warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator S07AU02
light” F3-22.
When using the Hill start assist system, a
braking effect may be felt even after the
brake pedal has been released. However,
for MT models, this braking effect should
disappear once the clutch pedal is re-
leased.
CAUTION
The braking power of the Hill start
assist system may not be sufficient
when strong braking power is Hill start assist OFF indicator
needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).
CAUTION
NOTE When starting on an up hill grade,
A slight jolt may be felt when the make sure the Hill start assist OFF
vehicle begins to move forward after indicator light is off.
being reversed.
If the Hill start assist OFF indicator
light is on, make sure the parking
brake is applied.
. when starting backward facing uphill
. when starting forward facing downhill To activate or deactivate the Hill start
. while the parking brake is applied assist system, perform the following steps.
. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC” NOTE
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position If you make an error when performing
. while the Hill start assist warning light/ any steps in the following procedure,
NOTE
For models with EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 20
mph (30 km/h) or more.
NOTE
Make sure the cruise control system is
turned off when the cruise control is not
in use to avoid unintentionally setting Cruise control indicator light (type A)
of the cruise control.
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side and release it. Then release the creased while driving with the cruise
accelerator pedal. control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
NOTE cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
If the set vehicle speed has not been leased, the vehicle will return to and
memorized (other than when it has maintain the previous cruising speed.
been temporarily canceled), the vehicle
speed can be set even if the “RES/SET” & To temporarily cancel the
switch is pressed to the “RES” side. cruise control
S07AQ02
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
WARNING switch to the “RES” side to return to the Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”
original cruising speed automatically. side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
For CVT models, you can cancel the The cruise control set indicator light in the the desired speed. Then, release the
cruise control by shifting the select combination meter will automatically illu- switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
lever into the “N” position. However, minate at this time. will be memorized and treated as the new
do not shift the lever into the “N” set speed.
position while driving except in case & To turn off the cruise control When setting the displayed unit as
of emergency. If the select lever is S07AQ03
There are two ways to turn off the cruise “MPH”:
shifted into the “N” position, the control:
engine brake will no longer work. The set speed can be increased 1 mph
. Press the cruise control main button (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
This could result in an accident.
again. SET” switch to the “RES” side.
The cruise control set indicator light in the . Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
When setting the displayed unit as
combination meter turns off when the “LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
“km/h”:
cruise control is canceled. vehicle is completely stopped).
The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
& To change the cruising speed switch to the “RES” side.
S07AQ04
! To increase the speed (by accelera- ! To decrease the speed (by the “RES/ ! To decrease the speed (by brake
tor pedal) SET” switch) pedal)
S07AQ0402 S07AQ0406 S07AQ0404
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac- 1. Depress the brake pedal to release
celerate the vehicle to the desired speed. cruise control temporarily.
7
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the the desired speed. Then, release the
2. When the speed decreases to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed is switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
desired speed, press the “RES/SET”
set and the vehicle will keep running at that will be memorized and treated as the new
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
speed without depressing the accelerator set speed.
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
pedal. When setting the displayed unit as keep running at that speed without depres-
“MPH”: sing the accelerator pedal.
The set speed can be decreased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “SET” side.
When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”:
The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side.
– CONTINUED –
& Cruise control indicator light BSD/RCTA (if equipped) at all even when a vehicle is present
S07AQ05
Refer to “Cruise control indicator light” F3- S07BM in a neighboring lane or approach-
31. The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with ing from either side.
Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross The driver is responsible for paying
& Cruise control set indicator Traffic Alert. attention to the rear and side areas
light of the vehicle.
S07AQ06 These functions enable the system to
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light” detect objects or vehicles to the rear,
F3-31. drawing attention to the driver when & System features
changing a lane or when driving in reverse. S07BM01
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
WARNING tions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
The driver is responsible for driving adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
safely. Always be sure to check the high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind
surroundings with your eyes when Spot Detection)
changing lanes or reversing the . To detect a vehicle approaching from
vehicle. the right or left while reversing the vehicle
The system is designed to assist the (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
driver to change lanes or reverse
safely by monitoring the rear and The system uses radar sensors for the
side areas of the vehicle. However, above functions.
you cannot rely on this system alone NOTE
in assuring the safety during a lane
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
change or reversing. Overconfi-
certified by the radio wave related laws
dence in this system could result in
of the U.S. and Canada. When driving in
an accident and lead to serious
other countries, certification of the
injury or death. Since the system
country where the vehicle is driven
operation has various limitations,
must be obtained. For certification in
the flashing or illumination of the
the U.S. and Canada, refer to “Certifica-
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
tion for the BSD/RCTA” F7-60.
may be delayed or it may not operate
– CONTINUED –
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ! Limitations of the detectability of reversing the vehicle.
S07BM0103
RCTA
S07BM010301
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,
the RCTA may not operate properly in
angled parking.
1) Operating range
Example 2
The system notifies the driver of another 1) The detection range of the radar sensors
vehicle approaching from either side when C) Vehicle that may be detected
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
Example 1
driver check the rear and side areas of the NOTE
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
vehicle when moving backward. 2) Area out of detection range of the radar The system may detect that a vehicle
If the system detects a vehicle approach- sensors (C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
ing from either side while moving back- A) Vehicle that may not be detected Always be sure to check the surround-
B) Parked vehicle ings with your eyes when reversing the
ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
following way. vehicle.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator WARNING
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
An approaching vehicle (A) may not
. A warning buzzer sounds.
be detected because the detection
. An icon appears on the rear view range is limited by the parked vehi-
camera screen (audio/navigation monitor) cle (B). Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
& System operation . In the following cases, the BSD/ eration and the BSD/RCTA warning
S07BM02 RCTA will temporarily stop operating indicator will disappear. However, if
! Operating conditions (or may stop operating) and the BSD/ the BSD/RCTA warning indicator has
S07BM0201
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the RCTA warning indicator will appear. appeared for a prolonged time, have the
following conditions are met. – When the radar sensor becomes system inspected at a SUBARU dealer
. The ignition switch is in the “ON” significantly misaligned (If the or- as soon as possible.
position. ientation of the radar sensor is . The detectability of the radar sen-
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and shifted for any reason, readjust- sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off. ment is required. Have the sensor tection may be impaired and the system
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 6 adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.) may not operate properly under the
mph (10 km/h) (except when reversing). – When a large amount of snow or following conditions.
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur- – When the rear bumper around the
. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”
face around the radar sensors radar sensors is distorted
position (when reversing).
– When the vehicle is driven on a – When ice, snow or mud adheres
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the snow-covered road or in an envir- to the rear bumper surface around 7
following situations. onment in which there are no ob- the radar sensors
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on. jects around (such as in a desert) for – When stickers, etc. are affixed on
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 a long time the areas of the radar sensors on
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF – When the temperature around the the rear bumper
indicator remains off (except when rever- radar sensors increased exces- – During adverse weather condi-
sing). sively due to long driving on uphill tions such as rain, snow or fog
grades in summer, etc. – When driving on wet roads such
NOTE – When the temperature around the as snow-covered roads and through
. In the following case, the BSD/RCTA radar sensors becomes extremely puddles
will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA low . The radar sensors may not detect or
warning indicator will appear. If the – When the vehicle battery voltage may have difficulty detecting the fol-
BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears, lowers lowing.
have your vehicle inspected at a – When the vehicle battery be- – Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. comes overvoltage destrians, stationary objects on the
– When a malfunction occurs in the road or road side, etc.
system, including the BSD/RCTA When the above conditions are cor-
– Vehicles with body shapes that
approach indicator light rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op-
the radar may not reflect (vehicles
– CONTINUED –
with a low body height such as & BSD/RCTA approach indica- driver of dangers under the following
sports cars or a trailer with no tor light/warning buzzer conditions.
cargo) S07BM03 . While the indicator light illuminates, if
– Vehicles that are not approaching When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/ you operate the turn signal lever toward
your vehicle even though they are in RCTA approach indicator light will operate the side in which this light turned on.
the detection area (either on a to alert the driver when there are vehicles
. When reversing the vehicle while the
neighboring lane to the rear or be- in the neighboring lanes. When reversing
system detects a vehicle approaching
side your vehicle when reversing) the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach
from either side.
(The system determines the pre- indicator light and warning buzzer will
sence of approaching vehicles operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
based on data detected by the radar approaching from the left or right side.
light dimming function
sensors.) ! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light S07BM030101
When the headlights are turned on, the
– Vehicles traveling at significantly S07BM0301
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
different speeds indicator light will be reduced.
– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-
most the same speed as your vehi- NOTE
cle for a prolonged time . You may have difficulty recognizing
– Oncoming vehicles the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the under the following conditions.
neighboring lane – When affected by direct sunlight
– Vehicles travelling at a signifi- – When affected by the headlight
cantly lower speed that you are beams from the vehicles behind
trying to overtake . While the illumination brightness
. On a road with extremely narrow control dial is in the fully upward
lanes, the system may detect vehicles position, even if the headlights are
driving in a lane next to the neighboring BSD/RCTA approach indicator light turned on, the brightness of the BSD/
lane. It is mounted in each side of the outside RCTA approach indicator light will not
. When the 8-inch audio/navigation mirrors. be reduced. For details about the
system is performing a software up- The indicator light will illuminate when a illumination brightness control dial,
date, the RCTA warning icons may not vehicle approaching from behind is de- refer to “Illumination brightness con-
be displayed on the audio/navigation tected. trol” F3-12.
screen until the update is complete. The indicator light will flash to warn the
away is driving on the near side of its for a prolonged time, have the system ! System malfunction indicator
lane from your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer. S07BM0403
& Certification for the BSD/ ! Canada-spec. models & Handling of radar sensors
RCTA S07BM0602 S07BM07
S07BM06
! U.S.-spec. models
S07BM0601
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
1) Sensors
NOTE The radar sensors, one on each side of the
This device complies with part 15 of the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the bumper.
following two conditions: (1) This de- To ensure correct operation of the BSD/
vice may not cause harmful interfer- RCTA, observe the following precautions.
ence, and (2) this device must accept . Always keep the bumper surface near
any interference received, including the radar sensors clean.
interference that may cause undesired . Do not affix any stickers or other items
operation. on the bumper surface near the radar
sensors.
. Do not modify the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the radar
sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near the
radar sensors to strong impacts. If a
sensor becomes misaligned, a system Reverse Automatic Braking detect people (including chil-
malfunction may occur, including the in- dren), animals or other moving
ability to detect vehicles entering the
System (if equipped)
S07BN
objects.
detection areas. If any strong shock is . Depending on the vehicle condi-
applied to the bumper, be sure to contact Reverse Automatic Braking is a system
designed to help avoid collisions or reduce tion or the surrounding environ-
your SUBARU dealer for inspection. ment, the sonar sensor’s ability
. Do not disassemble the radar sensors. collision damage when reversing the
vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected to detect objects may be compro-
mised.
NOTE in the reversing direction, the system will
If the radar sensors require repair or notify the driver with a warning sound and
replacement, or the bumper area may activate the vehicle’s brakes auto- NOTE
around the radar sensors requires matically.
The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys-
repair, paintwork or replacement, con- tem records and stores the following
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis- WARNING
data when automatic braking operates.
tance. . Reverse Automatic Braking is not It does not record conversations, per- 7
a system intended to replace the sonal information or other audio data.
driver’s responsibility to check . Distance from the object
surrounding areas for vehicles or . Vehicle speed
obstacles to avoid a collision. . Accelerator pedal operation status
. The driver is responsible for driv- . Brake pedal operation status
ing safely. Always be sure to . Select lever position
check the surroundings visually . Outside temperature
when reversing the vehicle. . The sensitivity setting of the sonar
sensors
. Since the system operation has
various limitations, the warning SUBARU and third parties contracted
sound or automatic braking may by SUBARU may acquire and use the
be delayed or may not operate at recorded data for the purpose of vehi-
all even when an obstacle is cle research and development.
present in the reversing direc- SUBARU and third parties contracted
tion. by SUBARU will not disclose or provide
. The system is not designed to the acquired data to any other third
– CONTINUED –
party except under the following con- ! Detecting range cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-
ditions. S07BN0101
ing the Reverse Automatic Braking
. The vehicle owner has given his/her system operation” F7-67.
consent.
. The disclosure/provision is based
on a court order or other legally en- & Operating conditions
forceable request. The Reverse Automatic Braking system
S07BN02
. Data that has been modified so that will operate when all of the following
the user and vehicle cannot be identi- conditions are met.
fied is provided to a research institution
for statistical processing or similar
purposes.
tem is set to on the rear bumper near the sonar not reflect the sound wave emitted
. The select lever is in the “R” position sensor from the sonar sensor
. The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9 – The rear bumper is exposed to – Objects that are too close to the
mph (1.5 to 15 km/h) strong impact, or the rear bumper is rear bumper when the select lever is
deformed set to the “R” position
NOTE . When the 8-inch audio/navigation – Objects with a surface which may
. In the following cases, the Reverse system is performing a software up- not reflect the sound wave emitted
Automatic braking system will not date, the Reverse Automatic Braking from the sonar sensor such as a
operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU System may not display the following chain link fence.
dealer to have the system inspected. items on the audio/navigation screen . Objects the system is not designed
– The EyeSight warning indicator until the update is complete. to detect
is illuminated – Display Icon on/off Function – Pedestrians
– The Reverse Automatic Braking – Distance Indicator Image – Moving objects including moving
fail indicator is illuminated – Warning Message vehicles
. When the Reverse Automatic Brak- . On a steep hill, the system’s auto- – Objects which absorb sound 7
ing system OFF indicator is illumi- matic braking ability will be reduced. waves such as cloth or snow
nated, the Reverse Automatic braking . The system is designed to avoid – Objects whose surface has a
system cannot be operated. collisions by automatic hard braking diagonal angle
. In the following cases, the system when the vehicle’s reversing speed is – Objects that are low to the ground
may not be able to properly detect an less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). such as parking blocks
obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU However, the system does not guaran- – Objects that are high above the
dealer to have the system inspected. tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid ground such as objects hanging
– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is collisions in any situation. from above
applied to the rear bumper near the . If the vehicle is reversed at an . The system may not be able to
sonar sensor extremely slow speed, the driver’s properly detect objects or may cause
– The rear bumper is modified operation may be prioritized. In this a system malfunction when the follow-
– The rear bumper has been re- case, automatic braking will not oper- ing conditions exist
moved and reattached ate.
– The ground clearance is changed . The system may not be able to detect High frequency sound from other
due to the vehicle’s loading condi- the following objects sources are nearby
tion or modification – Sharp or thin objects such as – Horn sound from another vehicle
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to poles, fences and ropes which may – Engine sound from other vehi-
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
! Obstacle detected and alert level When an object is detected in the rever-
S07BN0301
sing direction, the range of detected object
will be shown on the audio/navigation
monitor.
A warning alarm will sound and, depend-
ing on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
! Object close behind warning
S07BN0302
! When the vehicle is being stopped ! After the vehicle is stopped by the short beeps followed by a long beep)
by the system system will activate to alert the driver that the
S07BN0303 S07BN0304
automatic will be released.
NOTE
Automatic braking only holds the vehi-
cle for 2 seconds. Before the automatic
brake is released, a warning sound (3
– CONTINUED –
& Reverse Automatic Braking When the OFF setting is shown, the NOTE
system ON/OFF setting corresponding setting is OFF. . When the settings cannot be chan-
S07BN05
While the select lever is shifted to the “R” Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be
position, the below functions of the Re- the setting ON. grayed out.
verse Automatic Braking system can be . The ON/OFF setting key may be
When the Reverse Automatic Braking greyed out if the Reverse Automatic
set by operating the audio/navigation system is turned OFF, the following in-
monitor. Braking system malfunctions, etc. In
dicator will illuminate. this case, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and then turn it
to the “ON” position again. If the setting
cannot be changed even after turning
the ignition switch to the “ON” position
again, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. The settings will be restored as
follows when the select lever is shifted
to the “R” position next time.
– Reverse Automatic Braking sys-
tem settings: default (ON setting)
– Object detection warning beep-
ing sound: the setting selected by
1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic operating the combination meter
RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the
Braking Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned display (color LCD)
2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic OFF. Also, the following settings can be chan-
Braking
RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the ged by operating the combination meter
3) ON setting key of the object detection
warning beeping sound Reverse Automatic Braking system is display (color LCD).
4) OFF setting key of the object detection turned ON. . Warning volume
warning beeping sound . Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF
When the ON setting key is shown, the For details, refer to “Menu screens” F3-
corresponding setting is ON. 38.
Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn
the setting OFF.
& RAB warning indicator & Handling of the sonar sen- objects in the reversing direction. If any
S07BN07
sors strong impact is applied to the rear
S07BN06 bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear have the system inspected.
bumper. To ensure the proper operation of
the Reverse Automatic Braking system, . Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
observe the following precautions. NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors re-
quires repair, paintwork or replace-
ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for
assistance.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
(337,1)
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 Tire chains ........................................................... 8-11
miles (1,600 km) ...................................................
S08
8-2 Rocking the vehicle .............................................. 8-11
Fuel economy hints ................................................ 8-2 Loading your vehicle.............................................8-11
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............... 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight ........................................ 8-12
Catalytic converter.................................................. 8-3 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ............... 8-13
Periodic inspections ............................................... 8-4 Roof rail ............................................................... 8-13
Driving in foreign countries ................................... 8-4 Trailer hitch (dealer option) ................................. 8-14
Driving tips for AWD models ................................. 8-4 Connecting a trailer .............................................. 8-15
Off road driving....................................................... 8-6 If not towing a trailer ............................................ 8-16
Before driving ........................................................ 8-6 Trailer towing ........................................................ 8-16
During driving........................................................ 8-6 Warranties and maintenance ................................. 8-17
After driving........................................................... 8-7 Maximum load limits............................................. 8-17
Winter driving.......................................................... 8-7 Trailer Hitches ...................................................... 8-20
Operation during cold weather ............................... 8-7 When you do not tow a trailer ............................... 8-21
Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................. 8-9 Connecting a trailer .............................................. 8-21
Corrosion protection ............................................. 8-10 Trailer towing tips................................................. 8-22 8
Snow tires ............................................................ 8-10
8-2 Driving tips/New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
New vehicle break-in driving – Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) S08AB monoxide)
S08AA The following suggestions will help to save S08AC
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter your vehicle checked and repaired by an
vehicle, have the problem S08AD
authorized SUBARU dealer.
checked and corrected as soon . Do not apply undercoating or rust
as possible. If you must drive prevention treatment to the heat shield of
under these conditions, drive catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
only with all windows fully open. tem.
. Keep the rear gate closed while . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
driving to prevent exhaust gas level.
from entering the vehicle.
WARNING
NOTE . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
Due to the expansion and contraction or park the vehicle anywhere
of the metals used in the manufacture near flammable materials (e.g.,
of the exhaust system, you may hear a grass, paper, rags or leaves),
crackling sound coming from the ex- The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter
operates at very high tempera-
haust system for a short time after the exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to
tures.
8
engine has been shut off. This sound is reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,
normal. thus providing cleaner exhaust. . Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter: pipe while the engine is running.
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small The exhaust gas is very hot.
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries Driving tips for AWD models
S08AE S08AF S08AG
To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
at all times, always have the recom- another country:
WARNING
mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct . Always maintain a safe driving
the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3. speed according to the road and
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- . Comply with all regulations and require- weather conditions in order to
formed at the specified time or mileage ments of each country. avoid having an accident on a
intervals. sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing tire
(s), all four tires must be the same
for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
tire placard is located on the There is little difference in handling, how-
driver’s door pillar. ever, during extremely sharp turns or
If all of four tires are not the same sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
for items (a) to (h), serious me- down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
chanical damage could occur to reduce your speed and maintain an ample
the drive train of your car, and distance from other vehicles.
affect the following. . Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended
— Ride
tire pressure is provided on the tire
— Handling placard, which is located under the door
— Braking latch on the driver’s side.
— Speedometer/Odometer . Never attempt to drive through pools
calibration All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine and puddles, or roads flooded with water.
power to all four wheels. AWD models Water entering the engine air intake or the
— Clearance between the body provide better traction when driving on exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
and tires slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and electrical parts may damage your vehicle 8
It also may be dangerous and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By and may cause it to stall.
lead to loss of vehicle control, shifting power between the front and rear . There are some precautions that you
and it can lead to an accident. wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide must observe when towing your vehicle.
added traction during acceleration and For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
added engine braking force during decel- F9-13.
CAUTION eration.
If you use a temporary spare tire to Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the may handle differently than an ordinary
original temporary spare tire stored two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may some features unique to AWD. For safety
result in severe mechanical damage purposes as well as to avoid damaging the
to the drive train of your vehicle. AWD system, you should keep the follow-
ing tips in mind.
. An AWD model is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
Off road driving your SUBARU while operating it off- . Never equip your vehicle with tires
S08AH road and not using common sense larger than those specified in this manual.
precautions such as those listed
WARNING here is not eligible for warranty & During driving
coverage. General precautions:
S08AH10
stops. This could create a fire hazard. mode” F7-26. Winter driving
Precautions when driving under espe- S08AI
the vehicle. CAUTION Clear away ice and snow that has accu-
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- mulated under the fenders to avoid making
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% . Adjust the washer fluid concen- steering difficult. During severe winter
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- tration appropriately for the out- driving, stop when and where it is safe to
perature varies according to how much it is side temperature. If the concen- do so and check under the fenders
diluted, as indicated in the following table. tration is inappropriate, sprayed periodically.
washer fluid may freeze on the ! Parking in cold weather
Washer Fluid Con- Freezing Temperature windshield and obstruct your S08AI0102
centration
view, and the fluid may freeze in WARNING
30% 10.48F (−128C) the reservoir tank.
50% −48F (−208C) . State or local regulations on Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
volatile organic compounds may gases under your vehicle. Keep
100% −498F (−458C) restrict the use of methanol, a snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
common windshield washer anti- from around your vehicle if you park
In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid, the vehicle in snow with the engine
freeze additive. Washer fluids
check the freezing temperatures in the running.
containing non-methanol anti-
table above when adjusting the fluid
freeze agents should be used
concentration to the outside temperature.
only if they provide cold weather
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with protection without damaging CAUTION
a different concentration from the one your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
used previously, purge the old fluid from . Do not use the parking brake
or washer system.
the piping between the reservoir tank and when parking for long periods in
washer nozzles by operating the washer cold weather since it could freeze
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if ! Before driving your vehicle in that position.
S08AI0101
the concentration of the fluid remaining in Before entering the vehicle, remove any . When the vehicle is parked in
the piping is too low for the outside snow or ice from your shoes because that snow or when it snows, raise the
temperature, it may freeze and block the could make the pedals slippery and driving wiper blades off the glass to
nozzles. dangerous. prevent damage to them.
While warming up the vehicle before . When the vehicle has been left
driving, check that the accelerator pedal, parked after use on roads heavily
brake pedal, and all other controls operate covered with snow, or has been
smoothly. left parked during a snowstorm,
icing may develop on the brake an extended period, it is best to have the roads. This may cause loss of vehi-
system, which could cause poor fuel tank filled to capacity. cle control.
braking action. Check for snow or & Driving on snowy and icy
ice buildup on the suspension,
disc brakes and brake hoses
roads CAUTION
S08AI02
underneath the vehicle. If there To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
is caked snow or ice, remove it, sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- Avoid prolonged continuous driving
being careful not to damage the speed driving, and sharp turning when in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
disc brakes and brake hoses and driving on snowy or icy roads. engine’s intake system and may
ABS harness. Always maintain ample distance between hinder the airflow, which could re-
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you sult in engine shutdown or even
When parking for long periods in cold to avoid the need for sudden braking. breakdown.
weather, you should observe the following To supplement the foot brake, use the
tips. engine brake effectively to control the ! Wiper operation when snowing
S08AI0201
1. For MT models, place the shift lever in vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models, when necessary.) the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to
place the select lever in the “P” position. Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha- the windshield or rear window. 8
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
the vehicle from moving. leading to loss of vehicle control. If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the
windshield or rear window, perform the
! Refueling in cold weather An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- following procedure.
S08AI0103 hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- . To thaw the windshield wiper blade
To help prevent moisture from forming in mance on snowy and icy roads. For rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, information on braking on slippery sur- selection in “ ” and the temperature set
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake for maximum warmth until the wiper blade
tank is recommended during cold weather. System)” F7-33 and “Vehicle Dynamics rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to
Use only additives that are specifically Control system” F7-35. “Climate control” F4-1.
designed for this purpose. When an anti-
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
freeze additive is used, its effect lasts WARNING deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
For models with cruise control: windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to
fuel level reaches half empty.
“Defogger and deicer” F3-87.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for Do not use the cruise control on
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
– CONTINUED –
use the rear window defogger. Refer to (b) Circumference radial, belted bias or bias tires
“Defogger and deicer” F3-87. (c) Speed symbol since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts (d) Load index to an accident.
to stick on the surface of the windshield (e) Construction
despite wiper operation, use the defroster Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
(f) Manufacturer
with the airflow selection in “ ” and the tires” as original equipment, which are
temperature set for maximum warmth. (g) Brand (tread pattern)
designed to provide an adequate measure
After the windshield gets warmed enough (h) Degrees of wear of traction, handling and braking perfor-
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away For the items (a) to (d), you must mance in year-round driving. In winter, it
using the windshield washer. Refer to obey the specification that is may be possible to enhance performance
“Windshield washer” F3-76. printed on the tire placard. The through use of tires designed specifically
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the tire placard is located on the for winter driving conditions.
wiper from working effectively. If snow is driver’s door pillar. When you choose to install winter tires on
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to If all of four winter tires are not your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the the same for items (a) to (h), size and type. You must install four winter
vehicle at road side, use the hazard serious mechanical damage tires that are of the same size, construc-
warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer could occur to the drive train of tion, brand and load range and you should
to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-8. your car, and affect the following. never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
— Ride
& Corrosion protection ling characteristics. When you choose a
S08AI03 — Handling tire, make sure that there is enough
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
— Braking clearance between the tire and vehicle
— Speedometer/Odometer body.
& Snow tires
S08AI04 calibration Remember to drive with care at all times
WARNING — Clearance between the body regardless of the type of tires on your
and tires vehicle.
. When replacing or installing win- It also may be dangerous and
ter tire(s), all four tires must be lead to loss of vehicle control,
the same for following items. and it can lead to an accident.
(a) Size . Do not use a combination of
& Tire chains cause you are using a traction device Loading your vehicle
S08AI05 could easily lead to a serious accident. S08AJ
CAUTION
& Rocking the vehicle WARNING
Tire chains cannot be used on your S08AI06
vehicle because of the lack of clear- If you must rock the vehicle to free it from . Never allow passengers to ride
ance between the tires and vehicle snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel- on a folded rear seatback in the
body. erator pedal slightly and move the shift cargo area. Doing so may result
lever/select lever back and forth between in serious injury.
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the . Never stack luggage or other
NOTE engine. For the best possible traction, cargo higher than the top of the
When tire chains cannot be used, use of avoid spinning the wheels when trying to seatback because it could tumble
another type of traction device (such as free the vehicle. forward and injure passengers in
spring chains) may be acceptable if use When the road surface is extremely the event of a sudden stop or
on your vehicle is recommended by the slippery, you can obtain better traction by accident. Keep luggage or cargo
device manufacturer, taking into ac- starting the vehicle with the transmission in low, as close to the floor as
count tire size and road conditions. 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT possible.
Follow the device manufacturer’s in- models). 8
structions, especially regarding max-
If your vehicle is a CVT model, for
imum vehicle speed.
information about holding the transmission
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
drive slowly, readjust or remove the manual mode” F7-26.
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with a
traction device. Overconfidence be-
– CONTINUED –
WARNING CAUTION
. When you carry something inside Do not carry spray cans, containers
the vehicle, secure it whenever with flammable or corrosive liquids
you can to prevent it from being or any other dangerous items inside
thrown around inside the vehicle the vehicle.
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
NOTE
. Do not pile heavy loads on the For better fuel economy, do not carry
roof. These loads raise the vehi- unneeded cargo.
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
& Vehicle capacity weight
. Secure lengthy items properly to S08AJ01 Vehicle placard
prevent them from shooting for- The load capacity of your vehicle is
ward and causing serious injury determined by weight, not by available
during a sudden stop. cargo space. The maximum load you can
. Never exceed the maximum load carry in your vehicle is shown on the
limit. If you do, some parts on vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
your vehicle can break, or it can side door pillar. It includes the total weight
change the way your vehicle of the driver and all passengers and their
handles. This could result in loss belongings, any optional equipment such
of control and cause personal as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
injury. Also, overloading can etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve- assembly) plus the vehicle capacity & Roof rail
hicle Weight Rating and weight. S08AJ04
Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition, the total weight applied to each
S08AJ02
axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
1) Crossbar
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you Cargo can be carried on the roof after
Certification label should confirm that GVW and front and securing the crossbars to the roof rails and 8
The certification label attached to the rear GAWs are within the GVWR and installing an appropriate carrying attach-
bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle ment. When installing crossbars and a
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and scale, found at a commercial weighing carrying attachment, follow the manufac-
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). station. turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is
designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must Do not use replacement tires with a lower
and carrying attachment) of no more than
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the load range than the originals because they
150 lbs (68 kg). Be sure not to exceed
combined total of weight of the vehicle, may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
optional equipment and trailer tongue range than the originals do not increase CAUTION
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
pending on the situation. The GVWR . When using a carrying attach-
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your ment, make sure that the total
vehicle – including standard equipment, carrying load of the cargo, cross-
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire bars and carrying attachment
– CONTINUED –
does not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Trailer hitch (dealer option) safety hazard.
Overloading may cause damage S08AK . Although towing regulations for
to the vehicle. trailer or caravan vehicles vary
. For cargo carrying purposes, the WARNING by state/region, all regulations
roof rails must be used together . Never exceed the maximum agree that specifications such
with the crossbars and any ap- weight specified for the trailer as the maximum gross trailer
propriate carrying attachment hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight must not exceed the les-
that may be needed. The roof weight could cause an accident ser of the following:
rails must never be used alone resulting in serious personal in- – Maximum gross trailer weight
to carry cargo. Otherwise, da- juries. Permissible trailer weight
mage to the roof or paint, or a – Maximum gross tongue
changes depending on the situa- weight
dangerous road hazard due to tion. For possible recommenda-
loss of cargo could result. – GVWR
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer towing” F8-16. – GAWR
NOTE . Trailer brakes are required when . Failure to comply with the proce-
the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs dures set forth will not only
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has compromise your safety, but will
gravity is altered with the weight of the
safety chains and that each chain also negate your insurance cov-
load on the roof, thus affecting driving
will hold the trailer’s maximum erage and/or may violate the state
characteristics.
gross weight. Towing trailers road and traffic acts and regula-
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard tions.
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind without safety chains could cre-
effects will be increased. ate a traffic safety hazard if the . Use only the ball mount supplied
trailer separates from the hitch with this hitch. Use the hitch only
due to coupling damage or hitch as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
ball damage. use with any type of weight dis-
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and tributing hitch.
safety pin for positive locking . The standard bumper beam must
placement before towing a trailer. be installed after you remove the
If the ball mount comes off the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
hitch receiver, the trailer could dealer for purchase of a standard
get loose and create a traffic bumper beam if you do not have
– CONTINUED –
maximum gross weight. The chains should 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch Trailer towing
cross under the trailer tongue to prevent wire harness by individually activating the S08AL
the tongue from dropping onto the ground brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
in case it should disconnect from the hitch trailer.
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
taking tight turn situations into account; NOTE loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
however, be careful not to let them drag on
Always disconnect the trailer wire har- brakes, tires and suspension and has an
the ground.
ness before launching or retrieving a adverse effect on fuel economy.
WARNING watercraft. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
Do not connect safety chains to any & If not towing a trailer of correct equipment and cautious opera-
S08AK02
part of the vehicle other than the . Remove the ball mount from the hitch tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
safety chain hooks. receiver tube and insert the receiver cover your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
onto the hitch receiver tube. purchasing a hitch and other necessary
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin towing equipment appropriate for your
connector of the hitch wire harness to vehicle. Do not use towing equipment
protect against possible damage. other than genuine SUBARU towing
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
four-pin connector using terminal grease. the instructions for proper installation and
use provided by the trailer or caravan’s
manufacturer.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
Hitch harness connector Regularly check that the hitch mounting
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
& Warranties and maintenance & Maximum load limits ! Total trailer weight
S08AL01 S08AL02 S08AL0201
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused by WARNING
trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow
a trailer, more frequent maintenance will Never exceed the maximum load
be required due to the additional load. limits explained in the following.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under Exceeding the maximum load limits
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty could cause personal injury and/or
and Maintenance Booklet”.) vehicle damage.
Under no circumstances should a trailer be
towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with CAUTION
any new powertrain component (engine,
transmission, differential, wheel bearings, . Adequate size trailer brakes are
etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of required when the trailer and its
driving. Total trailer weight
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight. The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
. Before towing a trailer, check the its cargo load) must never exceed the 8
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs maximum total trailer weight in the follow-
and tongue load. Make sure the ing table.
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
– CONTINUED –
Certification label
GVWR of your vehicle that is given by
SUBARU is shown on the certification Gross Axle Weight
label located at the bottom of driver’s side The total weight applied to each axle Tongue load 8
door pillar of your vehicle. (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating does not exceed the maximum value of
passengers and luggage inside the vehi- 200 lbs (90 kg).
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
1) Jack F: Front cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
2) Bathroom scale ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper
The tongue load can be weighed with a distribution of the load in the trailer. Never enter the passenger compartment
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration load the trailer with more weight in the through the drilled hole. Exhaust
above. When weighing the tongue load, be back than in the front; approximately 60 gas contains carbon monoxide, a
sure to position the towing coupler at the percent of the trailer load should be in the colorless and odorless gas which is
height at which it would be during actual front and approximately 40 percent in the dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
towing, using a jack as shown. rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as Also, drilling the frame or under-
possible on both the left and right sides. body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to vehicle and cause corrosion around
prevent a change in weight distribution the drilled hole.
while driving.
WARNING CAUTION
If the trailer is loaded with more . Do not modify the vehicle ex-
weight in the back of trailer’s axle haust system, brake system, or
than in the front, the load is taken off other systems when installing a
the rear axle of the towing vehicle. hitch or other trailer towing
! Side mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
S08AL0403
electrical system requires modifications to when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its road service representative or profes-
capacity and accommodate wiring sional to repair the flat tire.
changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera- vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
tion of the turn signals and the brake lights getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire
each time you connect a trailer to your is firmly secured.
vehicle.
& Trailer towing tips
! Tires S08AL05
S08AL0405
CAUTION
WARNING
. For models equipped with the
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, Never tow a trailer when the tempor- BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and
check that the standard side mirrors ary spare tire is used. The temporary RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
provide a good rearward field of view spare tire is not designed to sustain driving support systems, when
without significant blind spots. If significant the towing load. Use of the tempor- towing a trailer, press the BSD/
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- ary spare tire when towing can result RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that in failure of the spare tire and/or less the system. The system may not
conform with Federal, state/province and/ stability of the vehicle. operate properly due to the
or other applicable regulations. blocked radar waves. For details
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,
! Trailer lights are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-
S08AL0404 refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”
8.
CAUTION F7-59.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and . For models equipped with RAB
Direct splicing or other improper proper inflation pressure should be in (Reverse Automatic Braking)
connection of trailer lights may accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s system, consult your SUBARU
damage your vehicle’s electrical specifications. Also check federal, state, dealer for additional information
system and cause a malfunction of province and/or other applicable regula- about towing a trailer.
your vehicle’s lighting system. tions. . Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can following procedure. : AT OIL TEMP warning light
be difficult and requires experience. Never 1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo- (CVT models)
accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the site direction to the way you want to turn.
bottom of the steering wheel with one If the coolant temperature high warning
2. Once the trailer begins to swing light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light
hand. around, straighten the steering wheel. illuminates, immediately turn off the air
3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc- conditioner and stop the vehicle in the
tion. nearest safe location. For further instruc-
4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line tions and additional information, refer to
with the trailer, then straighten the steering the following sections.
again. – “If you park your vehicle in case of
an emergency” F9-2
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
– “Engine overheating” F9-12
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed – “Coolant temperature low indicator
immediately by your nearest SUBARU light/Coolant temperature high warn-
dealer. ing light” F3-16
– “AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT
! Driving on grades models)” F3-18
S08AL0503
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if neces- . For CVT models, avoid using the
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an
engine braking effect and prevent over- uphill slope instead of using the parking
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not brake or foot brake. That may cause the
make sudden downshifts. transmission fluid to overheat.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the following indicators be-
cause the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating.
To reverse around a corner, perform the : Coolant temperature high warning light
! Parking on a grade
S08AL0504
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
8
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
models) or “P” position (CVT models)
and shut off the engine.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
(363,1)
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in case of an Towing ................................................................... 9-13
emergency ............................................................
S09
9-2 Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes............... 9-13
Temporary spare tire .............................................. 9-2 Using a flat-bed truck ........................................... 9-15
Maintenance tools................................................... 9-3 Towing with all wheels on the ground ................... 9-16
Tool locations ........................................................ 9-4 Access key fob – if access key fob does not
Using the jack........................................................ 9-4 operate properly ................................................ 9-17
Flat tires................................................................... 9-5 Locking and unlocking ......................................... 9-17
Changing a flat tire ................................................ 9-5 Switching power status ........................................ 9-17
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Starting engine ..................................................... 9-18
(U.S.-spec. models) .............................................. 9-8 Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9 opened................................................................ 9-19
How to jump start ................................................. 9-10 Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof
Engine overheating............................................... 9-12 does not close ................................................... 9-19
If steam is coming from the engine If your vehicle is involved in an accident........... 9-20
compartment ...................................................... 9-12
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment ...................................................... 9-12
9
S09AA
the turn signals do not work.
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
The hazard warning flasher should be original pressure sensor/trans-
used in day or night to warn other drivers mitter being transferred, the low
when you have to park your vehicle under tire pressure warning light will
emergency conditions. illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to This indicates the tire pressure
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
The hazard warning flasher can be acti- able to monitor all four road
vated regardless of the ignition switch wheels. Contact your SUBARU
position. dealer as soon as possible for
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the tire and sensor replacement and/
hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off or system resetting.
by pushing the switch again.
1) Tool bucket
2) Spare tire
Flat tires
S09AC
WARNING
dent. NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when- cated before using it.
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position
(CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
have everyone get out of the vehicle.
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
tire.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts when the spare tire is
installed. This could cause the nuts
to become loose and lead to an
accident.
– CONTINUED –
on the wrench because you may exceed WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system will
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut activate only when the vehicle is driven.
torque checked at the nearest automotive Never place a tire or tire changing Also, this system may not react immedi-
service facility. tools in the passenger compartment ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
after changing wheels. In a sudden example, a blow-out caused running over
stop or collision, loose equipment a sharp object).
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in WARNING
the proper place.
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
& Tire pressure monitoring never brake suddenly. Instead,
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. perform the following procedure.
models) (1) Keep driving straight ahead
S09AC02
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
1) Support holder safe place. Otherwise an acci-
dent involving serious vehicle
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
damage and serious personal
compartment. Install with the support
injury could occur.
holder facing upward and secure the flat
tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt. (3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
NOTE to the COLD tire pressure
If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try shown on the vehicle placard
turning the support holder upside on the door pillar on the
down. driver’s side.
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
16. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel If this light still illuminates while
vides the driver with the warning message
nut wrench in their storage locations. driving after adjusting the tire
indicated by sending a signal from a
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
sensor that is installed in each wheel when
cant damage and a fast leak that
tire pressure is severely low.
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it one minute, promptly contact a Jump starting
with a spare tire as soon as SUBARU dealer to have the sys- S09AD
possible. tem inspected.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a WARNING
wheel rim is replaced without the . Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
original pressure sensor/trans- Do not let it come in contact with
mitter being transferred, the low the eyes, skin, clothing or the
tire pressure warning light will vehicle.
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute. If battery fluid gets on you, thor-
This indicates the TPMS is unable oughly flush the exposed area
to monitor all four road wheels. with water immediately. Get med-
Contact your SUBARU dealer as ical help if the fluid has entered
soon as possible for tire and your eyes.
sensor replacement and/or sys- If battery fluid is accidentally
tem resetting. swallowed, immediately drink a
. When a tire is repaired with liquid large amount of milk or water,
sealant, the tire pressure warning and obtain immediate medical
valve and transmitter may not help. 9
operate properly. If a liquid sea- Keep everyone including chil-
lant is used, contact your nearest dren away from the battery.
SUBARU dealer or other qualified . The gas generated by a battery
service shop as soon as possi- explodes if a flame or spark is
ble. Make sure to replace the tire brought near it. Do not smoke or
pressure warning valve and light a match while jump starting.
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if . Never attempt jump starting if the
there is no damage to it and if the discharged battery is frozen. It
sealant residue is properly could cause the battery to burst
cleaned off. or explode.
If the light illuminates steadily . Whenever working on or around a
after blinking for approximately battery, always wear suitable eye
– CONTINUED –
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut
Engine overheating 2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the until it stops. Release the pressure from
S09AE
engine compartment. Refer to “Engine the radiator. After the pressure has been
hood” F11-5. fully released, remove the cap by pressing
WARNING Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If down and turning it.
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
Never attempt to remove the radiator the engine and contact an authorized
cap until the engine has been shut SUBARU dealer for repair.
off and has fully cooled down. When 3. After the coolant temperature high
the engine is hot, the coolant is warning light that has blinked or illumi-
under pressure. Removing the cap nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.
while the engine is still hot could For details about the warning light, refer to
release a spray of boiling hot cool- “Coolant temperature low indicator light/
ant, which could burn you very Coolant temperature high warning light”
seriously. F3-16.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
road and stop the vehicle in a safe If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
location. mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
& If steam is coming from the NOTE
engine compartment For details about how to check the
S09AE01
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ coolant level or how to add coolant,
“OFF” position and get everyone away refer to “Engine coolant” F11-11.
from the vehicle until it cools down. 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal- tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then
er. remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator
with coolant.
& If no steam is coming from the
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
engine compartment radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
S09AE02
1. Keep the engine running at idling radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
speed. clockwise slowly without pressing down
hole until its thread can no longer be seen. ! Rear towing hook
S09AF0105
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle
out of the cargo area.
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. ! Rear tie-down holes plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper. S09AF0107 return the plugs to their original places.
WARNING WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook Use the rear tie-down holes only for
except when towing your vehicle. downward anchoring. If they are
. Be sure to remove the towing used to anchor the vehicle in any
hook after towing. Leaving the other direction, cables may slip out
towing hook mounted on the of the holes, possibly causing a
vehicle could interfere with prop- dangerous situation.
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi- & Using a flat-bed truck
cle is struck from behind. S09AF02
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. & Towing with all wheels on the locked.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier ground . Remember that the brake booster
properly with safety chains. Each safety S09AF03
and power steering do not func-
chain should be equally tightened and care tion when the engine is not run-
must be taken not to pull the chains so ning. Because the engine is
tightly that the suspension bottoms out. turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
CAUTION and steering wheel.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly 9-17
Access key fob – if access key & Locking and unlocking & Switching power status
fob does not operate properly
S09AP01 S09AP02
1. Apply the parking brake.
S09AP 2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT
models) or the select lever to the “P”
CAUTION (Park) position (CVT models).
3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models)
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
or the brake pedal (CVT models).
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key fob and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key fob and the push-
button ignition switch.
1) Release button
The following functions may be inoperable 2) Emergency key
because of strong radio signals in the
While pressing the release button of the
surrounding area or a low battery condition
access key fob, take out the emergency
of the access key fob.
key. 9
. Locking/unlocking doors (including the
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
rear gate)
emergency key in the procedure described 4. Hold the access key fob with the
. Switching power status in “Locking and unlocking from the out- buttons facing you, and touch the push-
. Starting engine side” F2-21. button ignition switch with it.
In such cases, perform the following NOTE When the communication between the
procedure. When the battery of the access access key fob and the vehicle is com-
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
key fob is discharged, replace it with a new pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
attach the emergency key back to the
one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access same time, the status of the push-button
access key fob.
key fob” F11-43. ignition switch changes to either of the
following.
. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated:
– CONTINUED –
9-18 In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly
“ACC” & Starting engine and the clutch pedal (MT models), press
. Under other conditions: “ON” S09AP03 the push-button ignition switch.
1. Apply the parking brake.
5. When the keyless access with push-
2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT
button start system is deactivated, press
models) or the select lever to the “P” NOTE
the push-button ignition switch with the If the engine does not start even though
(Park) position (CVT models).
clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake the above procedure was followed
pedal (CVT models) released. The status 3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models). precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.
of the push-button ignition switch then
changes to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Rear gate – if the rear gate CAUTION Moonroof (if equipped) – if the
cannot be opened moonroof does not close
S09AG
Never operate the rear gate open S09AJ
lever with fingers because doing so
In the event that you cannot open the rear may cause an injury. Always use a If the moonroof does not close, we
gate by operating the rear gate opener flat-head screwdriver or a similar recommend that you have the system
button, you can open it from inside the tool. checked by a SUBARU dealer.
cargo area.
9
1. Remove the access cover at the 3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using the right position using a flat-head screw-
a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl driver or a similar tool.
tape or a cloth.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind
the rear gate trim panel.
Appearance care
Exterior care.......................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior............................................. 10-5
S10
Washing ............................................................... 10-2 Seat fabric ............................................................ 10-5
Waxing and polishing............................................ 10-3 Leather seat materials .......................................... 10-6
Cleaning alloy wheels ........................................... 10-4 Synthetic leather upholstery ................................. 10-6
Corrosion protection ............................................ 10-4 Seatbelt ................................................................ 10-6
Most common causes of corrosion ....................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
To help prevent corrosion ..................................... 10-5 panel, console panel, and switches.................... 10-6
Monitor................................................................. 10-7
10
Exterior care the cover surface may be da- to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
S10AA maged. washing brush directly on the camera
& Washing . Since your vehicle is equipped lens. The image quality of the rear view
S10AA01
with a rear wiper, automatic car- camera may deteriorate.
CAUTION wash brushes could become The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
tangled around it, damaging the beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
. When washing the vehicle, the wiper arm and other compo- vehicle at least once a month to avoid
brakes may get wet. As a result, nents. Ask the automatic car- contamination by road grime.
the brake stopping distance will wash operator not to let the
be longer. To dry the brakes, drive brushes touch the wiper arm or Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
the vehicle at a safe speed while to fix the wiper arm on the rear of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the
lightly depressing the brake ped- window glass with adhesive tape vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-
al to heat up the brakes. before operating the machine. light.
. Do not wash the engine compart- . For models with a rod-type roof Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,
ment and area adjacent to it. If antenna, remove the antenna rod and bird droppings should be washed off
water enters the engine air intake before washing your car at a car by using a light detergent, as required. If
or electrical parts, it will cause wash. If the antenna rod remains you use a light detergent, make certain
engine trouble or a malfunction attached, it may scratch the roof. that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
of electrical equipment. When reinstalling the removed strong soap or chemical detergents. All
. When washing inner fenders, un- antenna rod, be sure to fully cleaning agents should be promptly
derbody, bumpers and protrud- tighten it. flushed from the surface and not allowed
ing objects such as exhaust to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
pipes and exhaust finishers, be with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
careful to prevent injuries from NOTE remaining water off with a chamois or soft
contacting sharp ends. . When having your vehicle washed in cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
an automatic car wash, make sure brush when washing down underbody,
. Do not use any organic solvents
beforehand that the car wash is of inner fenders and suspension to effec-
when washing the surface of the
suitable type. tively remove mud and dirt off.
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents . The rear view camera lens has a hard
is used to wash the cover sur- coating to help prevent scratches.
face, completely rinse off the However, when washing the vehicle or
detergent with water. Otherwise, cleaning the camera lens, be careful not
coat. When in doubt, it is always best to & Cleaning alloy wheels Corrosion protection
contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto S10AA04
. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of S10AB
paint specialist. any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on Your SUBARU has been designed and
too long, it may be difficult to clean off. built to resist corrosion. Special materials
CAUTION
. Do not use soap containing grit to clean and protective finishes have been used on
Do not use any agents with organic the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
solvents on the surface of the bulb cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly fine appearance, strength, and reliable
assembly cover. However, if a polish with water. Do not clean the wheels with a operation.
or wax with organic solvents is stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
applied to the cover surface, com- washing device. & Most common causes of cor-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax. . Clean the vehicle (including the alloy rosion
Otherwise, the cover surface may be wheels) with water as soon as possible The most common causes of corrosion
S10AB01
vehicle remains for a long time, even assistance. Cleaning the interior
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry. Repair chips and scratches in the paint as S10AC
soon as you find them. Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
. High temperatures will cause corrosion control panel, audio equipment, instru-
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry Check the interior of the vehicle for water ment panel, center console, combination
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
because that could cause corrosion. Oc- organic solvents.)
& To help prevent corrosion casionally check under the mats to make
S10AB02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent sure the area is dry. CAUTION
corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar- Do not use sharp instruments or
promptly after driving on any of the age. In such a garage, corrosion can be window cleaner containing abra-
following surfaces. caused by dampness. If you wash the sives to clean the inner surface of
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the rear window. They may damage
. roads that have been salted to prevent
the garage when wet or covered with the conductors printed on the win-
them from freezing in winter
snow, that can cause dampness. dow.
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other & Seat fabric
After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door S10AC01
mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
very thorough washing. vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
latch should be inspected and lubricated
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum 10
Before the beginning of winter, check the periodically.
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
condition of underbody components, such Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry
them are found to be rusted, they should thoroughly.
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact If the stain does not come out, try a
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind commercially-available fabric cleaner.
of maintenance and treatment if you need Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
– CONTINUED –
make sure it does not affect the fabric covered, or the windows shaded, to pre- & Seatbelt
adversely. Use the cleaner according to its vent fading or shrinkage. S10AC09
For details about how to clean the seatbelt,
instructions. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” F1-20.
may be treated with a commercial leather
CAUTION spray lacquer. You will discover that each & Climate control panel, audio
leather seat section will develop soft folds
When cleaning the seat, do not use
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
panel, instrument panel, con-
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
genuine leather. sole panel, and switches
materials. Doing so could damage S10AC04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate. & Synthetic leather upholstery control panel, audio equipment, instru-
S10AC03 ment panel, center console, combination
The synthetic leather material used on the
meter panel, and switches.
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
& Leather seat materials or detergent and water, after first vacuum- CAUTION
S10AC02 ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe . Do not use organic solvents such
quality natural product which will retain its
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial as paint thinners or fuel, or
distinctive appearance and feel for many
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic strong cleaning agents that con-
years with proper care.
leather materials may be used when tain those solvents. Doing so
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the necessary. could damage the surface and
surface can cause the material to become
cause the color to deteriorate.
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular CAUTION
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber . Do not use chemical solvents that
cloth should be performed monthly, taking Strong cleaning agents such as contain silicone on the vehicle
care not to soak the leather or allow water solvents, paint thinners, window audio system, electrical compo-
to penetrate the stitched seams. cleaner or fuel must never be used nents of the air-conditioner or
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning on leather or synthetic interior ma- any switches. If silicone adheres
woolen fabrics may be used to remove terials. Doing so could damage the to these parts, it may cause
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry surface and cause the color to damage to electrical compo-
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If deteriorate. nents.
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and head restraints be
& Monitor
S10AC05
To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-
tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone
cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is
extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth
moistened with neutral detergent then
carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the 10
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
(393,1)
Tire replacement ................................................. 11-26 Headlights (models with halogen headlights) ...... 11-36
Wheel replacement ............................................. 11-27 Front turn signal light ......................................... 11-38
Alloy wheels ........................................................ 11-27 Parking light ....................................................... 11-38
Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 11-28 Front fog light (if equipped) ................................ 11-38
Adding the windshield washer fluid..................... 11-28 Rear combination lights...................................... 11-38
Windshield washer fluid ...................................... 11-28 Backup light ....................................................... 11-40
Replacement of wiper blades ............................ 11-29 License plate light .............................................. 11-40
Windshield wiper blade assembly........................ 11-29 Map light ............................................................ 11-41
Window wiper blade rubber................................. 11-30 Vanity mirror light (if equipped)........................... 11-41
Rear window wiper blade assembly..................... 11-31 Dome light and cargo area light .......................... 11-41
Rear window wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-32 Other bulbs ........................................................ 11-42
Battery ................................................................. 11-33 Replacing key battery .........................................11-42
Fuses ................................................................... 11-34 Safety precautions.............................................. 11-42
Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 11-43
Installation of accessories ................................. 11-35
Replacing transmitter battery .............................. 11-44
Replacing bulbs .................................................. 11-36
Headlights (models with LED headlights) ............ 11-36
erative. NEVER use a circuit tes- when the engine is running and remote engine start system (a
ter for this wiring. If your SRS remain hot for some time after the dealer option), temporarily place
airbag or seatbelt pretensioner engine has stopped. the remote engine start system in
needs service, consult your near- . Do not spill engine oil, engine service mode to prevent it from
est SUBARU dealer. coolant, brake fluid or any other unexpectedly starting the engine.
fluid on hot engine components.
NOTE This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
& When checking or servicing
SUBARU does not endorse the use of in the engine compartment
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys- “ON” position, the cooling fan S11AB03
tems and strongly advises against may operate suddenly even when
performing these services on a the engine is stopped. If your
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap- body or clothes come into con-
proved flushing systems use chemi- tact with a rotating fan, that could
cals and/or solvents which have not result in serious injury. To avoid
been tested or approved by SUBARU. risk of injury, perform the follow-
SUBARU warranties do not cover any ing precautions.
part of the vehicle which is damaged by – Models with push-button start
adding or applying chemicals and/or system:
solvents other than those approved or Always turn the push-button
recommended by SUBARU. ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
& Before checking or servicing operation indicator on the
switch is turned off. Then take
in the engine compartment the access key fob out from CAUTION
S11AB01
the vehicle. . Do not contact the drive belt
WARNING
– Models without push-button cover while checking the compo-
. Always stop the engine and apply start system: nents in the engine compartment.
the parking brake firmly to pre- Always remove the key from Doing so may cause your hand to
vent the vehicle from moving. the ignition switch. slip off the cover and result in an
. Always let the engine cool down. . Before performing any servicing unexpected injury.
Engine parts become very hot on a vehicle equipped with a . Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down comple- Engine hood To open the hood:
tely. Doing so may result in a burn S11AC 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
or other injury. Note that the oil windshield, return them to their original
filter becomes very hot when the CAUTION position.
engine is running and remains
hot for some time after the engine . When you open the engine hood,
has stopped. do not stand the wiper blades up.
Furthermore, while the hood is
open, do not operate the wind-
& When checking or servicing shield wipers. Doing so could
result in damage to the engine
in the engine compartment hood and wiper blades.
while the engine is running
S11AB02 . Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
WARNING
closing the engine hood.
A running engine can be dangerous. . Do not push the hood forcibly to
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, close it. It could deform the metal.
hair and tools away from the cooling . Be extremely careful opening the 2. Pull the hood release knob under the
fan, drive belt and any other moving engine hood when the wind is instrument panel.
engine parts. Removing rings, strong. The engine hood could
watches and ties is advisable. close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to
11
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION judged by the lowest of the two levels. If . The engine low oil level warning light
the oil level is below the low level mark, may stay illuminated when the engine
If the level gauge cannot be pulled add oil so that the full level is reached. is started straight after topping up or
out easily, twist the level gauge right changing the engine oil. In such cases,
and left, then gently pull it out. park the vehicle on a level surface and
CAUTION wait for more than a minute until the oil
Otherwise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself. . Be careful not to touch the engine level settles, after which the warning
oil filter when removing the oil light will turn off. Refer to “Engine low
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, filler cap. Doing so may result in a oil level warning light” F3-18.
and insert it again. burn, a pinched finger, or may
cause some other injury.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly S11AE02
inserted until it stops. . Use only engine oil with the Change the oil and oil filter according to
recommended grade and vis- the maintenance schedule in the “War-
cosity. ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
. Be careful not to spill engine oil changed more frequently than listed in
when adding it. If oil touches the the maintenance schedule when driving
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad on dusty roads, when short trips are
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If frequently made, or when driving in ex-
engine oil gets on the exhaust tremely cold weather.
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
NOTE
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil . Changing the engine oil and oil filter
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
should be performed by a well-trained 11
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
into the engine, you must use the level for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
1) Full level gauge to confirm that the oil level is
2) Low level Fully trained mechanics are on standby
correct. at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level NOTE special tools, spare parts and recom-
mended oil for this work, and also, used
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again. . To prevent overfilling the engine oil, oils are properly disposed of.
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the do not add any additional oil above the . If performing oil replacement your-
level gauge. The engine oil level must be upper level when the engine is cold.
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
& Cooling fan, hose and con- Never attempt to remove the radiator
nections cap until the engine has been shut
S11AF03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling off and has cooled down completely.
fan which is thermostatically controlled to Since the coolant is under pressure, 1) “FULL” level mark
operate when the engine coolant reaches you may suffer serious burns from a 2) “LOW” level mark
a specific temperature. spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed. Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate 1. Check the coolant level on the outside
even when the coolant temperature high of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
warning light blinks or illuminates in RED, 2. If the level is close to or lower than the
the cooling fan circuit may be defective. “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica- “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
tor light/Coolant temperature high warning empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
light” F3-16. coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration. 11
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-34 and “Fuse panel
located in the engine compartment” F12-
12.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary,
there may be a leak in the engine cooling
– CONTINUED –
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the It is not necessary to clean or wash the air
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that cleaner element.
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
& Replacing the air cleaner ele- cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
ment cleaner case (front).
S11AG01
Replace the air cleaner element according 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under NOTE
extremely dusty conditions, replace it Install the air cleaner element so that
more frequently. It is recommended that the surface with “UPR” printed on it
you always use genuine SUBARU parts. faces upward.
1) Clip
It may be difficult to replace the spark It is unnecessary to check the deflection of It is not necessary to check the transmis-
plugs. It is recommended that you have the the drive belt periodically because your sion oil level. Check that there are no
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU engine is equipped with an automatic belt cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
dealer. tension adjuster. However, replacement of oil inspection should be performed accord-
the belt should be done according to the ing to the maintenance schedule in the
The spark plugs should be replaced maintenance schedule in the “Warranty “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
according to the maintenance schedule and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book- SUBARU dealer for replacement.
let”.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn, & Recommended grade and
CAUTION contact your SUBARU dealer. viscosity
S11AJ02
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
Make sure the cables are replaced in oils and additives. Never use different
the correct order. brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
& Recommended spark plugs
S11AH01
For the recommended spark plugs, refer to
“Electrical system” F12-8.
Alcohol contained in the brake reservoir is used for both the brake and Clutch fluid (MT models)
fluid may damage them. clutch systems and has chambers for each S11AP
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid system. & Checking the fluid level
S11AP01
when adding it. If brake fluid If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
touches the exhaust pipe, it may recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use WARNING
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or only brake fluid from a sealed container.
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the Never let clutch fluid contact your
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it eyes because clutch fluid can be
& Recommended brake fluid harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
off. S11AO02
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
CAUTION For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
Never use different brands of brake
advisable.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand. CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
1) “MAX” level line refilling, there may be a leak. If
2) “MIN” level line you suspect a problem, have the
A) The brake fluid level must be checked in vehicle checked at your SUBARU
this area. dealer.
Check the fluid level monthly. . When clutch fluid is added, be
Check the fluid level on the outside of the careful not to allow any dirt into
reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level the tank.
for the brake system at the shaded area in . Never splash the clutch fluid over
the illustration. For MT models, this painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch Check the fluid level monthly. Brake booster
fluid may damage them. Check the fluid level on the outside of the S11AQ
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid reservoir. Because this reservoir is used If the brake booster does not operate as
when adding it. If clutch fluid for both the brake and clutch systems and described in the following, have it checked
touches the exhaust pipe, it may has chambers for each system, be sure to by your SUBARU dealer.
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or check the fluid level for the clutch system
1. With the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the at the shaded area in the illustration. If
“OFF” position, depress the brake pedal
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
several times, applying the same pedal
off. recommended clutch fluid to “MAX”.
force each time. The distance the pedal
. The fluid level for the clutch Use only clutch fluid from a sealed contain- travels should not vary.
system must be checked at the er.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
inboard side of the reservoir. It the engine. The pedal should move slightly
cannot be checked at the out- & Recommended clutch fluid down to the floor.
S11AP02
board side of the reservoir. Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
CAUTION for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
Never use different brands of clutch not change.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing 4. Start the engine again and run for
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if approximately one minute then turn it off.
they are the same brand. Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression. 11
Brake pedal If the free play is not within proper Clutch pedal (MT models)
S11AR
specification, contact your SUBARU deal- S11AS
er.
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play according
reserve distance according to the main- & Checking the brake pedal re- to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and serve distance ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance Booklet”. S11AR02
& Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system Replacement of brake pad
free play S11BF and lining
S11AS02
Ensure that the Hill start assist system S11AT
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
– CONTINUED –
result in the need for costly brake located on the parking brake lever. Parking brake stroke
rotor repair or replacement. S11AU
Tires and wheels ! Winter (snow) tires temperature outside. By way of example,
S11AV
S11AV0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on the following table shows the required tire
& Types of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However pressures that correspond to various out-
S11AV01
winter tires do not perform as well as side temperatures when the temperature
You should be familiar with type of tires
summer tires and all season tires on roads in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
present on your vehicle.
other than snow-covered and icy roads. Example:
! All season tires Ti r e s i z e : P 2 2 5 / 6 0 R 1 7 9 8 H a n d
S11AV0101
All season tires are designed to provide an & Tire pressure monitoring P225/55R18 97H
adequate measure of traction, handling system (TPMS) (if equipped) Standard tire pressures:
and braking performance in year-round S11AV02
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
driving including snowy and icy road The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as sending a signal from a sensor that is Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- Outside Adjusted pressure
or on icy roads. temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
ing system will activate only when the
All season tires are identified by “ALL Front Rear
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire 308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
the tire sidewall.
pressure (for example, a blow-out caused
! Summer tires 38 37
by running over a sharp object). 108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55)
S11AV0102
Summer tires are high-speed capability If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm −108F (−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)
tires best suited for highway driving under garage and will then drive the vehicle in
dry conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire If the low tire pressure warning light
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on pressures may cause the low tire pressure illuminates when you drive the vehicle in 11
slippery roads such as on snow-covered or warning light to illuminate. To avoid this cold outside air after adjusting the tire
icy roads. problem when adjusting the tire pressures pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered in a warm garage, inflate the tires to tire pressures using the method described
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the pressures higher than those shown on above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
use of winter (snow) tires. the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
When installing winter tires, be sure to by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for see that the low tire pressure warning light
replace all four tires. every difference of 108F (5.68C) between turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
the temperature in the garage and the pressure warning light does not turn off,
– CONTINUED –
the tire pressure monitoring system may When a tire is replaced, adjustments are as soon as possible.
not be functioning normally. In this event, necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the operation of the tire pressure monitoring wheel rim is replaced without the
system inspected as soon as possible. system. As with wheel replacement, there- original pressure sensor/transmitter
fore, you should have the work performed being transferred, the low tire pres-
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- by a SUBARU dealer.
tween tires and the road surface causes sure warning light will illuminate
the tires to warm up. After illumination of steadily after blinking for approxi-
WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by an If the low tire pressure warning light the TPMS is unable to monitor all
increase in the outside air temperature or does not illuminate briefly after the four road wheels. Contact your
by an increase in the temperature in the ignition switch is turned ON or the SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
tires can cause the low tire pressure light illuminates steadily after blink- for tire and sensor replacement and/
warning light to turn off. ing for approximately one minute, or system resetting. If the light
you should have your Tire Pressure illuminates steadily after blinking
System resetting is necessary when the for approximately one minute,
Monitoring System checked at a
wheels are changed (for example, a switch promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are to have the system inspected.
ble.
installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have
this work performed by a SUBARU dealer If this light illuminates while driving,
following wheel replacement. never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
& Tire inspection
S11AV03
It may not be possible to install TPMS ally reducing speed. Then slowly Check on a daily basis that the tires are
valves on certain wheels that are on the pull off the road to a safe place. free from serious damage, nails, and
market. Therefore, if you change the Otherwise an accident involving stones. At the same time, check the tires
wheels (for example, a switch to snow serious vehicle damage and serious for abnormal wear.
tires), use wheels that have the same part personal injury could occur. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately
number as the standard-equipment if you find any problem.
If this light still illuminates while
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
driving after adjusting the tire pres- NOTE
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
sure, a tire may have significant
will not fully function and the warning light . When the wheels and tires strike
damage and a fast leak that causes
on the combination meter will illuminate curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
steadily after blinking for approximately ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
one minute. rough surface, they can suffer damage
– CONTINUED –
& Wear indicators cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The direction when the wheels are fitted.
S11AV06
resulting loss of vehicle control can
lead to an accident. & Tire rotation
S11AV07
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible.
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-
tional tires
Each tire incorporates a tread wear in- 1) Front
dicator, which becomes visible when the
depth of the tread grooves decreases to
0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be replaced
when the tread wear indicator appears as
a solid band across the tread.
11
WARNING Example of rotational direction marked on
the sidewall
When a tire’s tread wear indicator 1) Front
becomes visible, the tire is worn
If the tires have specific rotational direc-
beyond the acceptable limit and
tion, refer to the arrow marked on the side
must be replaced immediately. With
wall.
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can The arrow should be pointing forward
– CONTINUED –
— Clearance between the body Use only those wheels that are Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-
and tires specified for your vehicle. Wheels maged easily. Handle them carefully to
not meeting specifications could maintain their appearance, performance,
It also may be dangerous and
interfere with brake caliper opera- and safety.
lead to loss of vehicle control,
tion and may cause the tires to rub
and it can lead to an accident. . When any of the wheels are removed
against the wheel well housing dur-
. Use only radial tires. Do not use and replaced for tire rotation or to change a
ing turns. The resulting loss of
radial tires together with belted flat tire, always check the tightness of the
vehicle control could lead to an
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
accident.
Doing so can dangerously re- miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
duce controllability, resulting in tighten it to the specified torque.
an accident. NOTE . Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
When any of the wheels are removed wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
and replaced for tire rotation or for any wheel.
& Wheel replacement other reason, always check the tight- . Never let the wheel rub against sharp
S11AV09
When replacing wheels due, for example, ness of the wheel nuts after driving protrusions or curbs.
to damage, make sure the replacement approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If . When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
wheels match the specifications of the any nut is loose, tighten it to the the center cap is replaced, be sure to
wheels that are fitted as standard equip- specified torque. replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
ment. Replacement wheels are available designed for alloy wheels.
from SUBARU dealers. . When stacking and storing removed
tires, place shock-absorbing material be- 11
tween the tires to protect the wheels from
becoming scratched.
Windshield washer fluid When there is only a small amount of & Windshield washer fluid
S11AX
washer fluid remaining, the windshield Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
S11AX02
washer fluid warning light will illuminate. washer fluid is unavailable use clean
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid. water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use
& Adding the windshield an anti-freeze type windshield washer
washer fluid fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
S11AX01
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
CAUTION surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it is
Never use engine coolant as washer diluted, as indicated in the following table.
fluid because it could cause paint
damage. Washer Fluid Freezing
Concentration Temperature
30% 10.48F (−128C)
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type A) 50% −48F (−208C)
100% −498F (−458C)
containing non-methanol anti- 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
CAUTION
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather . Do not clean the wiper blades
protection without damaging with gasoline or a solvent, such
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades as paint thinner or benzine. This
or washer system. will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades. 11
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original positions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,
– CONTINUED –
illustration, so that it can be removed. & Rear window wiper blade as-
2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber sembly
through the slit to remove it. S11AZ03
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
3. To install a new wiper blade rubber, window.
perform the removal procedure in the
reverse order. After installation, check that
the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the
end of the cap.
NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper
blade rubber replacement. We recom-
mend that you contact your SUBARU 3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
dealer for wiper blade rubber replace- you to remove it from the wiper arm.
ment if necessary.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
lower it in position.
terclockwise.
11
– CONTINUED –
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber the plastic support.
S11AZ04
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery remove rings, metal watchbands,
the wiper may scratch the rear window S11BA and other metal jewelry. Never
glass. allow metal tools to contact the
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the WARNING positive battery terminal and any-
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. thing connected to it WHILE you
. Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of
lower it in position.
all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir-
ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result.
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is . Keep everyone including children
highly flammable and explosive. away from the battery.
. For safety, in case an explosion . Charge the battery in a well-
does occur, wear eye protection ventilated area.
or shield your eyes when working . Battery posts, terminals and re-
near any battery. Never lean over lated accessories contain lead
a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals
. Do not let battery fluid contact known to the State of California
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- to cause cancer and reproductive
cause battery fluid is a corrosive harm. Batteries also contain
acid. If battery fluid gets on your other chemicals known to the
skin or in your eyes, immediately State of California to cause can-
flush the area with water thor- cer. Wash hands after handling.
oughly. Seek medical help imme- 11
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
– CONTINUED –
Fuses
S11BB
CAUTION
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life. One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
Replacing bulbs & Headlights (models with LED & Headlights (models with ha-
S11BE headlights) logen headlights)
S11BE18 S11BE47
WARNING CAUTION
Bulbs may become very hot while Halogen headlight bulbs become
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, very hot while in use. If you touch
turn off the lights and wait until the the bulb surface with bare hands or
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is greasy gloves, fingerprints or
a risk of sustaining a burn injury. grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
CAUTION prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
Replace any bulb only with a new moistened with alcohol.
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could LED headlight warning light (type B)
result in a fire. For the specified The LED headlight warning light illumi- NOTE
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb nates if the LED headlights malfunction. . If headlight aiming is required, con-
chart” F12-14. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
dealer as soon as possible. adjustment of the headlight aim.
NOTE . It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
For models with type B combination SUBARU dealer if necessary.
meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the
SRH OFF indicator appears on the Perform the following steps to replace the
combination meter when the ignition bulbs.
switch is in the “ON” position. It
indicates that SRH has been deacti-
vated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
– CONTINUED –
1) Tail light 1) Guide pins 8. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
2) Rear side marker light 2) Catch
9. Reinstall the covers.
3) Rear turn signal light 3) Clip
4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear 7. Put the rear combination light assem-
combination light assembly by turning it bly into place while aligning the 2 guide
counterclockwise. pins and a catch with the guide holes and a
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and clip on the vehicle.
replace it with a new one.
6. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks. 11
– CONTINUED –
& Vanity mirror light (if & Dome light and cargo area
equipped) light
S11BE34 S11BE21
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION 11
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
Cargo area light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
– CONTINUED –
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. Replacing key battery swallow them.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. S11BK . There is a danger of an explosion
3. Install a new bulb. The access key fob/transmitter battery if the battery is incorrectly re-
4. Reinstall the lens. may be discharged under the following placed. Replace only with the
conditions. same or equivalent type of the
& Other bulbs . The operation of the keyless access battery.
S11BE29
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. function is unstable . Batteries should not be exposed
Have the bulbs replaced by your . The operating distance of the remote to excessive heat such as bright
SUBARU dealer if necessary. keyless entry system is unstable sunlight, fire or the like.
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis- NOTE
tance
. Replace only with the same or
Replace the battery with a new one. equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
& Safety precautions . Dispose of used batteries according
S11BK04 to local laws.
CAUTION . Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
or in the access key fob/transmit- may result in a malfunction.
ter when replacing battery. . It is recommended that the battery
. Before replacing the battery, re- be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
move any static electricity. . Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
. Be careful not to touch or damage that the transmitter functions properly.
the printed circuit board in the
access key fob/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
CAUTION
When removing or reinstalling the
access key fob cover, make sure that
the plastic part does not come off or
become misaligned.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl 4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to side facing upward as shown in the figure.
remove the cover.
11
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
– CONTINUED –
2. Remove the transmitter case from the 1) Negative (−) side facing up
key head. 4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery making sure to install the new
1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl battery with the negative (−) side facing up.
tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a 5. Put together the transmitter case by
flat-head screwdriver. fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
Specifications
Specifications........................................................ 12-2 Temporary spare tires ........................................... 12-9
S12
Dimensions........................................................... 12-2 Brake disc ............................................................ 12-9
Engine .................................................................. 12-3 Fuses and circuits .............................................. 12-10
Fuel ...................................................................... 12-3 Fuse panel located in the passenger
Engine oil ............................................................. 12-4 compartment ................................................... 12-10
Manual transmission, front differential and rear Fuse panel located in the engine compartment ... 12-12
differential gear oil .............................................. 12-6 Bulb chart............................................................ 12-14
Fluids ................................................................... 12-7 Safety precautions.............................................. 12-14
Engine coolant...................................................... 12-7 Bulb chart .......................................................... 12-15
Electrical system .................................................. 12-8 Vehicle identification .......................................... 12-18
Tires ..................................................................... 12-8
12
12-2 Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
S12AA
& Dimensions
S12AA01
in (mm)
Item
Overall length 175.8 (4,465)
Overall width 71.0 (1,800)
Overall height 63.6 (1,615)
Wheel base 104.9 (2,665)
Tread Front 61.0 (1,550)
Rear 61.2 (1,555)
Ground clearance*1 8.7 (220)
Specifications/Specifications 12-3
& Engine
S12AA02
& Fuel
S12AA08
12
– CONTINUED –
12-4 Specifications/Specifications
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
Specifications/Specifications 12-5
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
– CONTINUED –
12-6 Specifications/Specifications
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
S12AA13
Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear Rear differential gear oil (MT models)
(CVT models) oil (CVT models)
3 3
. SUBARU Extra MT* . SUBARU Extra MT*
Oil grade . API classification . API classification GL-5 API classification GL-5
GL-5 (75W-90)*4 (75W-90)
. 75W-90*
. 90
SAE viscosity
No. and ap- —
plicable tem-
perature
*: Recommended
Oil capacity*1 3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Imp qt) Imp qt)
Remarks*2 “Manual transmission oil” “Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differential gear oil” F11-15
F11-14
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.
Specifications/Specifications 12-7
& Fluids
S12AA10
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake – “Brake fluid” F11-15
fluid
Clutch fluid (MT models) FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake –
fluid “Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-16
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-10.
12
– CONTINUED –
12-8 Specifications/Specifications
& Tires
S12AA05
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts
by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,
refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-5.
Specifications/Specifications 12-9
12
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
23 10A DRL
24 Empty
25 Empty
26 10A BACK UP
27 Empty
28 20A TRAIL R.FOG
29 Empty
30 Empty
31 Empty
32 7.5A ILLUMI
33 7.5A KEY SW A
34 Empty
35 Empty
36 7.5A KEY SW B
37 7.5A STOP
38 7.5A EYE SIGHT
12
– CONTINUED –
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
23 10A E/G2
24 Empty
25 Empty
26 20A O2 HTR
27 15A E/G1
28 Empty
29 30A BACKUP
30 25A R. DEF
31 20A AUDIO
32 30A VDC SOL
33 25A MAIN FAN
34 25A SUB FAN
35 10A DEICER
36 15A F. FOG
37 15A BLOWER
38 15A BLOWER
39 Empty
40 30A F. WIPER
12
41 15A F. WASH
42 15A R. WIPER
43 Empty
44 Empty
Bulb chart
S12AC
& Safety precautions
S12AC03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
12
NOTE
Lights A, B, C, D and E are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
– CONTINUED –
12
13
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs week, starting with “01” to represent
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 the first full week of the calendar
or otherwise altered from
kg). year; the second two figures repre-
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
WARNING means the 1st week of 2001.
treaded, or otherwise al-
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment The following makings are also
S13AB0103
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
does not mean the vehicle can speeds.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated ! Maximum permissible infla-
load. tion pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN) S13AB010301
S13AB0102 The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kPa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS” 13
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review of
For example, “V” means 149 mph the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
– CONTINUED –
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE- The vehicle placard is attached to
The load rating at the maximum
S13AB010302
WALL 2 POLYESTER” the driver’s side door pillar.
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading Example:
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg (UTQG)
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) S13AB010305
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” F13-14.
WARNING & Recommended tire inflation
Maximum load rating applies pressure
S13AB02
only to the tire, not to the ! Recommended cold tire infla-
vehicle. Putting a load rated tion pressure
tire on any vehicle does not S13AB0201
For recommended cold tire inflation
mean the vehicle can be pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
loaded up to the tire’s rated refer to “Tires” F12-8.
load. The vehicle placard shows original
! Vehicle placard
S13AB0202 tire size, recommended cold tire
! Construction type inflation pressure on each tire at
S13AB010303
Applicable construction of this tire. maximum loaded vehicle weight,
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL seating capacity and loading infor-
BELTED RADIAL” mation.
! Adverse safety consequences
! Construction of under-inflation
S13AB010304
The generic name of each cord S13AB0203
Driving at high speeds with exces-
material used in the plies (both sively low tire pressures can cause
sidewall and tread area) of this tire. the tires to flex severely and to
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause & Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tread separation, and failure of the . Accessory weight
S13AB03
flated, bears the load.
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
vehicle control could lead to an those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
accident. replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
! Measuring and adjusting air sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure
pressure to achieve proper in- power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been
flation and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
S13AB0204
Check and, if necessary, adjust the items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more.
pressure of each tire (including the stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord
spare) at least once a month and stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the
before any long journey. Check the . Bead tire.
tire pressures when the tires are The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation
cold. Use a pressure gauge to steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent
adjust the tire pressures to the by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds.
specific values. Driving even a short the rim. . Cracking
distance warms up the tires and . Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side-
increases the tire pressures. Also, A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire
the tire pressures are affected by components in the bead. extending to cord material.
the outside temperature. It is best to . Bias ply tire . Curb weight
check tire pressure outdoors before A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with
driving the vehicle. When a tire cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the
becomes warm, the air inside it laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
expands, causing the tire pressure less than 90 degrees to the center- coolant, and if so equipped, air 13
to increase. Be careful not to mis- line of the tread. conditioning and additional weight
takenly release air from a warm tire . Carcass optional engine.
to reduce its pressure. The tire structure, except tread and
– CONTINUED –
. Passenger car tire sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation
A tire intended for use on passen- brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger heavy duty battery, and special trim. ignation for a rim by style or code.
vehicles, and trucks, that have a . Radial ply tire . Rim width
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) A pneumatic tire in which the ply Nominal distance between rim
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. cords that extend to the beads are flanges.
. Ply laid at substantially 90 degrees to . Section width
A layer of rubber-coated parallel the centerline of the tread. The linear distance between the
cords. . Recommended inflation pres- exteriors of the sidewalls of an
. Ply separation sure inflated tire, excluding elevations
A parting of rubber compound The cold inflation pressure recom- due to labeling, decoration, or pro-
between adjacent plies. mended by a vehicle manufacturer. tective bands.
. Pneumatic tire . Reinforced tire . Sidewall
A mechanical device made of rub- A tire designed to operate at higher That portion of a tire between the
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or loads and at higher inflation pres- tread and bead.
other materials, that, when sures than the corresponding stan- . Sidewall separation
mounted on an automotive wheel, dard tire. The parting of the rubber compound
provides the traction and contains . Rim from the cord material in the side-
the gas or fluid that sustains the A metal support for a tire or a tire wall.
load. and tube assembly upon which the . Test rim
. Production options weight tire beads are seated. The rim on which a tire is fitted for
The combined weight of those . Rim diameter testing, and it may be any rim listed
installed regular production options Nominal diameter of the bead seat. as appropriate for use with that tire.
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in . Rim size designation . Tread 13
excess of those standard items Rim diameter and width. That portion of a tire that comes into
which they replace, not previously contact with the road.
considered in curb weight or acces-
– CONTINUED –
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
13
– CONTINUED –
& Tire care – maintenance and rotation. After tire rotation, adjust axle’s GAWR are shown on the
safety practices the tire pressures and make sure vehicle certification label located at
S13AB04
. Check on a daily basis that the the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- the bottom of driver’s side door
tires are free from serious damage, tened. For information about the pillar.
nails, and stones. At the same time, tightening torque and tightening The GVWR and front and rear
check the tires for abnormal wear. sequence for the wheel nuts, refer GAWRs are determined by not only
. Inspect the tire tread regularly to “Flat tires” F9-5. the maximum load rating of tires but
and replace the tires before their also loaded capacities of the vehi-
tread wear indicators become visi- & Determining compatibility of cle’s suspension, axles and other
ble. When a tire’s tread wear in- tire and vehicle load capaci- parts of the body.
dicator becomes visible, the tire is ties Therefore, this means that the
S13AB06
worn beyond the acceptable limit The sum of four tires’ maximum vehicle cannot necessarily be
and must be replaced immediately. load ratings must exceed the max- loaded up to the tire’s maximum
With a tire in this condition, driving imum loaded vehicle weight load rating on the tire sidewall.
at even low speeds in wet weather (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
can cause the vehicle to hydro- maximum load ratings of two front & Adverse safety conse-
plane. Possible resulting loss of tires and of two rear tires must quences of overloading on
vehicle control can lead to an exceed each axle’s maximum handling and stopping and on
accident. loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original tires
S13AB07
. To maximize the life of each tire equipment tires are designed to Overloading could affect vehicle
and ensure that the tires wear fulfill those conditions. handling, stopping distance, and
uniformly, it is best to rotate the The maximum loaded vehicle vehicle and tire performance in the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). weight is referred to Gross Vehicle following ways. This could lead to
For information about the tire rota- Weight Rating (GVWR). And each an accident and possibly result in
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” axle’s maximum loaded capacity is severe personal injury.
F11-25. Replace any damaged or referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
unevenly worn tires at the time of ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each . Heavy and/or high-mounted
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine 13-11
loads could increase the risk of luggage load capacity. For exam- Vehicle load limit – how to
rollover. ple, if the “XXX” amount equals determine
. Stopping distance will increase. 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 S13BU
. Brakes could overheat and fail. lb passengers in your vehicle, the The load capacity of your vehicle is
. Suspension, bearings, axles and amount of available cargo and determined by weight, not by avail-
other body parts could break or luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. able cargo space. The load limit of
experience accelerated wear that (1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.) your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight placard attached to the driver’s side
. Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded door pillar. Locate the statement
. Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not “The combined weight of occupants
. Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo and cargo should never exceed
and luggage load capacity calcu- XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
& Steps for Determining Cor- lated in Step 4.
rect Load Limit vehicle’s placard.
S13AB08 6. If your vehicle will be towing a The vehicle placard also shows
1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be seating capacity of your vehicle.
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult The total load capacity includes the
cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this total weight of driver and all pas-
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s reduces the available cargo and sengers and their belongings, any
placard. luggage load capacity of your ve- cargo, any optional equipment such
2. Determine the combined weight hicle. as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
of the driver and passengers that carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
will be riding in your vehicle. a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of can be calculated by the following
the driver and passengers from method. 13
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
available amount of cargo and weight of occupants + total weight
– CONTINUED –
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine
of optional equipment + tongue load indicated on the vehicle placard further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
of a trailer (if applicable)) with the statement “The combined be carried.
weight of occupants and cargo
For information about vehicle load- Example 1B
should never exceed 900 lbs or
ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
408 kg”.
F8-11.
For example, if the vehicle has one
& Calculating total and load occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
capacities varying seating plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
configurations kg).
S13BU01
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine 13-13
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-15
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe- excessive temperature can lead to
form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of sudden tire failure.
ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. The grade C corresponds to a level
A tire marked C may have poor of performance which all passenger
& Treadwear traction performance. car tires must meet under the
S13AC02
The treadwear grade is a compara- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING dards No. 109.
the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to Grades B and A represent higher
trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight- levels of performance on the la-
government test course. ahead braking traction tests, boratory test wheel than the mini-
For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accelera- mum required by law.
would wear one and one-half (1- tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
1/2) times as well on the govern- WARNING
or peak traction characteris-
ment course as a tire graded 100. tics. The temperature grade for this
The relative performance of tires tire is established for a tire that
depends upon the actual conditions is properly inflated and not
of their use, however, and may & Temperature A, B, C
S13AC04 overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the underinflation, or excessive
due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the loading, either separately or
service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of in combination, can cause
road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat heat buildup and possible tire
when tested under controlled con- failure.
& Traction AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
S13AC03
The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. 13
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those Sustained high temperature can
grades represent the tire’s ability to cause the material of the tire to
stop on wet pavement as measured degenerate and reduce tire life, and
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
Index
14
14-2 Index
A B
Abbreviation ................................................................... 3 Battery
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-33 Drainage prevention function ................................... 2-24
Warning light ......................................................... 3-20 Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9
Access key fob ............................................................ 2-2 Replacement (access key fob) ............................... 11-43
Warning light ......................................................... 3-25 Replacement (transmitter) ..................................... 11-44
Accessories ............................................................. 11-35 Vehicle battery ..................................................... 11-33
Accessory power outlet ................................................ 6-7 Booster seat .............................................................. 1-32
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-12 Brake
Air conditioner Assist.................................................................... 7-32
Automatic climate control.......................................... 4-6 Booster ....................................................... 7-31, 11-17
Manual climate control.............................................. 4-7 Disc ...................................................................... 12-9
Air filtration system .................................................... 4-11 Fluid ........................................................... 11-15, 12-7
Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-7 Pad .................................................................... 11-20
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-24 Parking ....................................................... 7-43, 11-20
All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-22 Pedal .................................................................. 11-18
Alloy wheel .............................................................. 11-27 System ................................................................. 7-31
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-4 Brake system............................................................. 7-31
Antenna...................................................................... 5-2 Warning light ......................................................... 3-21
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-33 Braking ..................................................................... 7-31
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-25 Tips ...................................................................... 7-31
Ashtray....................................................................... 6-9 Breaking-in of new brake pads................................... 11-20
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-18 BSD/RCTA ................................................................ 7-52
Auto on/off headlights................................................. 3-65 Approach indicator light/warning buzzer .................... 7-56
Auto-dimming mirror/compass ............................. 3-78, 3-79 OFF indicator......................................................... 3-32
Automatic headlight beam leveler OFF switch ............................................................ 7-59
Warning light ......................................................... 3-31 Warning indicator .......................................... 3-32, 7-58
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Warning volume ..................................................... 7-57
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ............................................... 1-14 Bulb
Chart .................................................................. 12-14
Replacement ....................................................... 11-36
Index 14-3
C Chime
Cargo area Key........................................................................ 3-5
Cover ................................................................... 6-11 Light ..................................................................... 3-65
Light............................................................. 6-3, 11-41 Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-13 Cigarette lighter .......................................................... 6-8
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Cleaning
Center console ............................................................ 6-6 Alloy wheels .......................................................... 10-4
Changing Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Coolant................................................................ 11-12 Ventilation grille...................................................... 4-10
Flat tire................................................................... 9-5 Climate control system................................................. 4-2
Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-9 Automatic ............................................................... 4-6
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-17 Manual................................................................... 4-7
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Clock ....................................................... 3-47, 3-51, 3-62
light....................................................................... 3-15 Clutch
Checking Fluid ................................................................... 11-16
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-18 Pedal .................................................................. 11-18
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-18 Coat hook ................................................................. 6-10
Clutch function ..................................................... 11-18 Combination meter display (color LCD)......................... 3-33
Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-19 Compass.......................................................... 3-78, 3-79
Coolant level ........................................................ 11-11 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-24
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-15 Fluid ........................................................... 11-15, 12-7
Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-16 Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............ 3-18
Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 11-28 Coolant ........................................................... 11-11, 12-7
Oil level (engine oil) ............................................... 11-8 Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-16
Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-25 Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-16
Installation of a booster seat ................................... 1-32 Cooling system ........................................................ 11-10
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ........................... 1-28 Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4
Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-33 Cruise control ............................................................ 7-48
Top tether anchorages............................................ 1-36 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-31
Child safety.................................................................... 4 Set indicator light ................................................... 3-31
Locks ................................................................... 2-28
14-4 Index
Index 14-5
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3 Hill descent control ............................................ 7-38, 7-40
Consumption indicator ............................................ 3-43 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2 Hill start assist ................................................. 7-45, 11-19
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-4 OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-22
Gauge .................................................................. 3-10 Warning light ......................................................... 3-22
Requirements.................................................. 7-3, 12-3 HomeLink®................................................................. 3-79
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-34 Hook
Fuses and circuits.................................................... 12-10 Cargo tie-down ...................................................... 6-13
Coat ..................................................................... 6-10
G Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-11
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-13 Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-13
Glove box ................................................................... 6-5 Horn ......................................................................... 3-90
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).......................... 8-13 Hose and connections .............................................. 11-11
H I
Hazard warning flasher.......................................... 3-8, 9-2 Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-4
Headlight Light ...................................................................... 3-5
Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-72 Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-12
Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-36 Immobilizer ................................................................ 2-15
Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-14 Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-29
Control switch ....................................................... 3-65 Indicator light
Flasher ................................................................. 3-67 BSD/RCTA OFF ............................................ 3-32, 3-35
Indicator light......................................................... 3-31 BSD/RCTA warning ....................................... 3-32, 3-35
Welcome lighting function ....................................... 3-66 Coolant temperature low ......................................... 3-16
High Beam Assist ...................................................... 3-67 Cruise control ........................................................ 3-31
High beam assist function........................................... 3-67 Cruise control set ................................................... 3-31
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30 Front fog light ........................................................ 3-31
Warning indicator................................................... 3-30 Headlight............................................................... 3-31
High beam assist warning indicator.............................. 3-30 High beam............................................................. 3-30
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-30 High beam assist ................................................... 3-30
High/low beam change (dimmer) ................................. 3-67 High beam assist warning ....................................... 3-30
14-6 Index
Hill descent control ................................................ 3-32 License plate light .................................................... 11-40
Hill start assist OFF ............................................... 3-22 Light
Immobilizer ........................................................... 3-29 Backup ............................................................... 11-40
Security ................................................................ 3-29 Cargo area .................................................... 6-3, 11-41
Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-30 Control switch ........................................................ 3-65
Steering responsive fog lights OFF .......................... 3-31 Daytime running..................................................... 3-70
Turn signal............................................................ 3-30 Dome............................................................ 6-2, 11-41
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................ 3-24 Front fog ..................................................... 3-72, 11-38
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ......................... 3-23 Front side marker ......................................... 3-65, 12-14
X-mode ................................................................ 3-32 Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-5
Inside mirror.............................................................. 3-78 License plate ....................................................... 11-40
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2 Map .............................................................. 6-2, 11-41
Parking ............................................................... 11-38
J Rear combination ................................................. 11-38
Jack-up point............................................................... 9-5 Rear side marker light........................................... 11-38
Jump starting .............................................................. 9-9 Stop ................................................................... 11-38
Tail ..................................................................... 11-38
K Turn signal .................................................. 3-74, 11-38
Key ............................................................................ 2-2 Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-41
Number plate .......................................................... 2-2 Loading your vehicle................................................... 8-11
Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5 Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-22
Replacement ......................................................... 2-15 Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-18
Keyless access with push-button start system................. 2-2 Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-33
Disabling keyless access functions .......................... 2-12
Warning chimes and warning indicator ..................... 3-25 M
When access key fob does not operate properly ....... 9-17 Maintenance
Keyless entry system ................................................. 2-17 Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule............................................................... 11-3
L Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-20
Lap belt pretensioner ................................................. 1-22 Tools...................................................................... 9-3
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-6 Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) ... 3-15
Index 14-7
Manual P
Transmission......................................................... 7-21 Parking
Transmission oil.................................................... 11-14 Brake.................................................................... 7-43
Manual mode ............................................................ 7-26 Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-20
Map light .......................................................... 6-2, 11-41 Light ................................................................... 11-38
Maximum load limits................................................... 8-17 Tips ...................................................................... 7-43
Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-8 Periodic inspections..................................................... 8-4
Mirror defogger.......................................................... 3-87 Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-3
Mirrors...................................................................... 3-78 Power
Moonroof .......................................................... 2-32, 9-19 Outlets ................................................................... 6-7
Multi-function display (black and white) ........................ 3-42 Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-87
Multi-function display (color LCD) ................................ 3-47 Steering ................................................................ 7-30
Steering warning light ............................................. 3-23
N Windows ............................................................... 2-28
New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2 Precautions against vehicle modification .............. 1-24, 1-68
Preparing to drive........................................................ 7-8
O Push-button
Odometer ................................................................... 3-9 Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6 Starting and stopping engine ............................ 7-9, 7-11
Oil filter..................................................................... 11-9
Oil level R
Engine.................................................................. 11-8 RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-15 OFF indicator......................................................... 3-32
Rear differential gear............................................. 11-15 Warning indicator ................................................... 3-32
Warning light ......................................................... 3-18 Rear
Oil pressure warning light ........................................... 3-17 Combination lights................................................ 11-38
Outside Differential gear oil ....................................... 11-15, 12-6
Mirror defogger...................................................... 3-87 Gate ............................................................ 2-31, 9-19
Mirrors.................................................................. 3-86 Turn signal light ................................................... 11-38
Temperature indicator..................................... 3-46, 3-50 Rear window
Overheating engine.................................................... 9-12 Defogger ............................................................... 3-87
14-8 Index
Index 14-9
Shift lock function .................................................. 7-28 Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-37
Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-11 Synthetic leather upholstery......................................... 10-6
Shoulder pretensioners............................................... 1-21
Snow tires....................................................... 8-10, 11-21 T
Snowy and icy roads.................................................... 8-9 Tachometer ................................................................ 3-8
Sounding a panic alarm.............................................. 2-19 Temperature warning light
Spark plugs..................................................... 11-14, 12-8 AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-18
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2 Coolant ................................................................. 3-16
Speedometer............................................................... 3-8 Temporary spare tire............................................ 9-2, 12-9
SRS Tether (child restraint system) ............................. 1-33, 1-36
Curtain airbag ....................................................... 1-58 Tie-down hooks/holes ................................................. 9-13
Frontal airbag........................................................ 1-47 Tire................................................................. 11-21, 12-8
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-58 Chains .................................................................. 8-11
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) . 4, 1-37 Inspection............................................................ 11-22
SRS airbag system Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-23
Monitors ............................................................... 1-66 Replacement ....................................................... 11-26
Servicing .............................................................. 1-67 Rotation .............................................................. 11-25
Warning light ......................................................... 3-15 Size and pressure .................................................. 12-8
Starting & stopping engine .................................... 7-9, 7-11 Types.................................................................. 11-21
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 7-41, 9-8, 11-21
Steering responsive fog lights system .......................... 3-72 Warning light ......................................................... 3-18
OFF indicator ........................................................ 3-31 Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-21
Steering Responsive Headlight.................................... 3-71 Tools.......................................................................... 9-3
Steering wheel Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-33, 1-36
Heater .................................................................. 3-89 Towing ...................................................................... 9-13
Power................................................................... 7-30 All wheels on the ground......................................... 9-16
Tilt/telescopic ........................................................ 3-89 Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-15
Stop light ................................................................. 11-38 Hooks ................................................................... 9-13
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-5 Weight .................................................................. 8-17
Sun visors................................................................... 6-3 Trailer
Sunshade ................................................................. 2-34 Connecting ............................................................ 8-15
14-10 Index
Index 14-11
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3 Wiper blades ....................................................... 11-29
Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-25 Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-87
Welcome lighting function ........................................... 3-66 Winter
Wheel Driving ................................................................... 8-7
Alloy.................................................................... 11-27 Tires ........................................................... 8-10, 11-21
Balance ............................................................... 11-24 Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-74
Nut tightening torque...................................... 12-8, 12-9 Wiper deicer .............................................................. 3-87
Replacement ........................................................ 11-27
Windows................................................................... 2-28 X
Windshield X-mode ..................................................................... 7-38
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-28 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Wiper and washer switches .................................... 3-76
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
(2,1)